2009 DA KOTA
D A KOTA
Chrysler LLC
81-326-0934
First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
OWNER’S MANUAL
2009
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefor.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
ously manufactured.
Copyright © 2008 Chrysler LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
.............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
...............................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
...............................75
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
................................... 163
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
.................................................235
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
...............................................331
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
...............................................349
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
..................................................399
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
..........................................417
10
INDEX
....................................................................427
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet
and various customer-oriented documents. You are
urged to read these publications carefully. Following the
instructions and recommendations in this manual will
help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained
technicians and genuine Mopart parts, and is interested
in your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed Index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION 5
1
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is located on
the left front corner of the instrument panel pad, visible
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle.
Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle
identification number and optional equipment.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN.
VIN Location
6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
INTRODUCTION 7
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
m A Word About Your Keys ................. 12
▫ Ignition Key Removal .................. 12
▫ Locking Doors With The Key ............. 15
m Steering Wheel Lock — If Equipped ......... 15
▫ If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering
Wheel.............................. 15
▫ To Release The Steering Wheel Lock ........ 15
▫ Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock
System ............................. 15
m Sentry Keyt Immobilizer System — If
Equipped ............................. 16
▫ Replacement Keys ..................... 17
▫ Customer Key Programming ............. 17
m Vehicle Security Alarm System — If Equipped . . 19
▫ To Set The Alarm...................... 19
▫ To Disarm The System .................. 19
m Illuminated Entry ....................... 20
▫ Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks . . . 20
2
m Remote Keyless Entry .................... 21
▫ To Unlock The Doors ................... 22
▫ To Lock The Doors .................... 22
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ................. 24
▫ General Information.................... 24
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters ....... 25
▫ Battery Replacement ................... 26
m Remote Starting System — If Equipped ....... 27
m Door Locks ........................... 29
▫ Manual Door Locks .................... 29
▫ Power Door Locks ..................... 29
▫ Child Protection Door Lock .............. 32
m Windows ............................. 34
▫ Power Windows ...................... 34
▫ Auto Down (Driver’s Side Only) ........... 35
▫ Window Lockout Switch ................ 35
▫ Wind Buffeting ....................... 35
m Occupant Restraints ..................... 36
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts .................... 37
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 42
▫ Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode –
If Equipped.......................... 43
▫ Center Lap Belts ...................... 43
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners .................. 44
▫ Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlertt).......................... 44
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women ........... 45
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Seat Belt Extender ..................... 45
▫ Driver And Right Front Passenger
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) –
Airbags............................. 46
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) .............. 56
▫ Child Restraint ....................... 58
m Engine Break-In Recommendations .......... 70
m Safety Tips ............................ 71
▫ Exhaust System ....................... 71
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ............................. 72
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The
Vehicle ............................. 73
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
2
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle has the
key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers
can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized
dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers
and keep them in a safe place.
Ignition Key Removal
Automatic Transmission
1. Place the shift lever in PARK.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
3. Remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder.
Ignition Key
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the
shift lever in PARK, the key may become temporarily
trapped in the ignition cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the
key to the right slightly, then remove the key as de-
scribed. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped, but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — ACC 4 — ON/RUN
2 — LOCK 5 — START
3 — OFF
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
2
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all the
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
When the steering wheel is in the LOCK position, the
steering and ignition systems are locked to provide
antitheft protection for your vehicle. It may be difficult to
turn the key from the LOCK position when starting your
vehicle. Move the steering wheel left and right while
turning the key until it turns easily. To remove the key,
depress and hold the release button located between the
ignition switch and the instrument panel. Turn the igni-
tion key to LOCK and remove the key.
Ignition Release Button
1 — ACC 4 — ON/RUN
2 — LOCK 5 — START
3 — OFF
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locking Doors With The Key
You can insert the key into the door lock cylinder with
either side up. To lock the driver’s door, turn the key
rearward. To unlock the driver’s door, turn the key
forward. For external door lock lubrication, refer to
“Body Lubrication” in Section 7.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering
wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the vehicle with-
out the ignition key. If the steering wheel is moved no
more than 1/2 turn in either direction, and the key is not
in the ignition switch, the steering wheel will lock.
If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering
Wheel:
With the engine running, turn the steering wheel upside
down, turn off the engine and remove the key. Turn the
steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock
engages.
To Release The Steering Wheel Lock:
Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine.
If the key is difficult to turn, move the wheel slightly to
the right or left to disengage the lock.
NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage
the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to
disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage
the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.
Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
PARK unless the key is in the ACC, or ON position, and
the brake pedal is pressed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
2
SENTRY KEYT IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The Sentry Keyt prevents unauthorized vehicle opera-
tion by disabling the engine. The system does not need to
be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the
engine.
NOTE: A key that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
key to try to start the engine. Either of these conditions
will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible.
NOTE:
•
The Sentry Keyt Immobilizer System is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
•
Exxon/Mobil Speedpass™, additional Sentry Keyst,
or any other transponder-equipped components on
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the same key chain will not cause a key-related
(transponder) fault unless the additional part is physi-
cally held against the ignition key being used when
starting the vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other RF
electronics will not cause interference with this system.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a Sentry Keyt is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Keyst from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Du-
plication of keys may be performed at an authorized
dealer or by following the customer key programming
procedure. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Keyt Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid Sentry Keyst, you can program
new Sentry Keyst to the system by performing the
following steps:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Keyt Transponder blank(s)
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
2
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three
seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first
key.
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will sound. In
addition, the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Keyt into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound.
In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing.
To indicate that programming is complete, the Vehicle
Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and
then turn off.
The new Sentry Keyt is programmed. The Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be pro-
grammed during this procedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed Sentry Keyt, contact your
authorized dealer for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys-
tem’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from
starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be
reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an
authorized dealer at the time of service to be
reprogrammed.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm system monitors the vehicle
doors and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the
Vehicle Security Alarm system is activated it will provide
both audible and visible signals. The horn will sound
repeatedly for the three minutes and the headlights and
Vehicle Security Light will flash for an additional 15 min-
utes. The engine will not run until the Vehicle Security
Alarm system is disarmed
To Set the Alarm
The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the
power door locks, or use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter to lock the doors. After all the doors are
locked and closed, the Vehicle Security Light in the
instrument cluster will flash rapidly for approximately
15 seconds to signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm
system is arming. After the Vehicle Security Alarm is set,
the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to
indicate that the system is armed.
NOTE: If the Vehicle Security Light stays on continu-
ously during vehicle operation, have the Vehicle Security
Alarm system checked by an authorized dealer.
To Disarm the System:
Use the RKE transmitter to unlock the door. If something
has triggered the system in your absence, the horn will
sound three times when you unlock the doors. Check the
vehicle for tampering.
The Vehicle Security Alarm system will also disarm if the
vehicle is started with a programmed Sentry Keyt.Ifan
unprogrammed Sentry Keyt is used to start a vehicle, the
engine will run for two seconds and then shut down.
After six unsuccessful attempts at starting the engine, the
system will shut down until the correct key is used. To
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
2
exit alarming mode, press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK
button or start the vehicle with a programmed Sentry
Keyt.
The Vehicle Security Alarm system is designed to protect
your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where
the system will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in the
vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE transmitter, the
alarm will sound when you pull the door handle to exit.
NOTE: You may accidentally activate the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm System (horn sounds and lights flash) by
entering the vehicle without using the RKE transmitter to
unlock the door(s). The system can be disarmed with the
RKE transmitter unlock button or by inserting a pro-
grammed Sentry Keyt into the ignition and turning the
key to the ON position.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks
All interior lights will illuminate in the vehicle when the
doors are unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
The interior lights will remain on for 30 seconds after the
last door is closed, or until all doors are closed and either
the ignition is turned to the ON position or a RKE
transmitter LOCK button is pressed.
There is also a battery saver feature that will turn the
interior lights off after eight minutes if the ignition is OFF
and a door is left open or the dimmer control is in the
interior lights ON position.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors or
activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to a maxi-
mum of 66 ft (20 m) using a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
1 — Lock
2 — Unlock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
2
To Unlock The Doors:
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock only the driver’s door, or twice
to unlock all the doors. When the unlock button is
pressed, the illuminated entry will initiate, and the
parking lights will flash twice.
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors
upon the first unlock button press by using the following
procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter.
2. Continue to hold the LOCK button for at least 4 sec-
onds, but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold
the UNLOCK button. A single chime will sound to
indicate that this feature has changed.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to
sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the
Vehicle Security Alarm System.
5. If the desired programming was not achieved, or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
To Lock The Doors:
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors. If the ignition is OFF, when the doors
are locked the parking lights will flash on once and the
horn will chirp once.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Horn Chirp Programming
The horn chirp feature is shipped from the assembly
plant activated. If desired, this feature can be disabled by
using the following procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on the RKE trans-
mitter.
2. After holding the LOCK button for four seconds, also
press the PANIC button within six seconds. A single
chime will sound to indicate that this feature has
changed.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
5. Test the horn chirp feature while outside of the vehicle
by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition in the OFF position and the key
removed.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
Security Alarm System.
6. If the desired programming was not achieved, or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
Flash Lamps With Lock Programming
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter.
2. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds,
also press the LOCK button within six seconds. A single
chime will sound to indicate that this feature has
changed.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
4. Test the Flash Lamps With Lock feature while outside
of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE
transmitter with the ignition in the OFF position and the
key removed.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
Alarm System.
5. If the desired programming was not achieved, or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
Using The Panic Alarm
To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is OFF,
press and release the PANIC button on the RKE trans-
mitter once. When the Panic mode is activated, the
interior lights will illuminate, the headlights and parking
lights will flash, and the horn will sound.
To cancel the Panic mode, press and release the PANIC
button on the RKE transmitter a second time. Panic mode
will automatically cancel after three minutes, or if the
vehicle is started or exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). During
the Panic Mode, the door locks and RKE systems will
function normally. Panic mode will not disarm the Ve-
hicle Security Alarm System, on vehicles so equipped.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE Transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions.
1. Weak batteries in the RKE transmitter. The expected
life of batteries is five years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
or CB radios.
Programming Additional Transmitters
This vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant with two
RKE transmitters programmed for this vehicle only. A
total of eight RKE transmitters can be programmed for
your vehicle. Additional RKE transmitters can be pro-
grammed to your vehicle through the use of currently
programmed RKE transmitters.
NOTE: When entering program mode using that cur-
rently programmed RKE transmitter, all other pro-
grammed RKE transmitters will be erased and you will
have to reprogram them for your vehicle.
Use the following procedure to program additional RKE
transmitters if the vehicle is not equipped with a Sentry
Keyt:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all the doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt. (Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this
programming procedure).
3. Place the key into the ignition.
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position. (Do not start the
engine.)
5. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
2
6. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds,
also press the PANIC button within six seconds.
7. When a single chime is heard, release both buttons.
The chime is an indication that you have successfully
entered program mode. All RKE transmitters that are to
be programmed must be done so within 60 seconds of
when the chime was heard.
8. Using the RKE transmitter to be programmed, press
and hold both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, simul-
taneously for two seconds, and then release.
9. Press and release the UNLOCK button. A single chime
will be heard.
10. Repeat steps 8 and 9 to program up to six additional
RKE transmitters.
11. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
12. Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to
60 seconds from when the original chime was heard.
After 60 seconds, all programmed RKE transmitters
function normally.
NOTE: If you do not have a programmed RKE trans-
mitter, contact your authorized dealer for details.
Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
remove the screw. With the RKE transmitter buttons
facing down, use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the
RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
elastomer seal during removal.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the + sign on battery to the + sign on the
inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid
touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may
cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves of the case together. Make sure there is an even
“gap” between the two halves. If equipped, install and
tighten the screw until snug. Test the RKE transmitter
operation.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a remote starting
system, which will allow the vehicle to be started from
distances up to approximately 300 ft (91 m) away from
the vehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitter, which is part of your ignition key.
In order to remote start your vehicle, the hood and all the
doors must be closed.
To remote start your vehicle, press the REMOTE START
button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds.
To indicate that the vehicle is about to start, the parking
lights will flash and the horn will sound briefly (if
programmed).
Battery Access Door
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
Once the vehicle has started, the engine will run for
15 minutes. To cancel remote start, press the REMOTE
START button once.
The parking lights will remain illuminated to indicate
that the vehicle has remote started and the engine is
running. The lights will turn off when the ignition is
turned to RUN or the remote start is cancelled.
To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a
remote start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. Then, prior to
the end of the 15-minute cycle, insert the key into the
ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position,
otherwise the engine will cancel remote start and auto-
matically turn off.
Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur:
•
If the engine stalls or the RPM exceeds 2500
•
Any engine warning light come on
•
The hood is opened
•
The Hazard switch is pressed
•
The transmission is moved out of PARK
Remote Start Button
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of
two times. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one
failed start, where the remote start sequence was initiated
but the engine stopped cranking without starting. After
either of these conditions, or if the Vehicle Security Alarm
System is activated, or if the PANIC button was pressed,
the vehicle must be reset by inserting a valid key into the
ignition and moving it to the RUN position, then back to
LOCK.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
All the doors can be manually locked from the inside by
pushing down the door lock plunger, located on the door
trim panel. Both front doors may be opened from the
inside with the door lock plunger in the down or locked
position.
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive, as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
2
If you press the power door LOCK switch while the key
is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from acciden-
tally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key,
or closing the door, will allow the locks to operate. A
chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and
the driver’s door is open, as a reminder to remove the
key.
Automatic Door Locks
If this feature is enabled, your door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph
(24 km/h).
This feature is enabled when your vehicle is shipped
from the assembly plant and can be disabled by using the
following procedure:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt. (Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this
programming procedure.)
3. Place the key into the ignition.
Power Door Lock Switch
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Within 10 seconds, cycle the key from the LOCK
position to the ON position and back to LOCK position,
a minimum of four times; ending in the LOCK position.
(Do not start the engine.)
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door LOCK
switch in the LOCK direction.
6. A single chime will be heard to indicate the feature has
been disabled.
7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above Steps.
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be disabled. If necessary, repeat
the above procedure.
Auto Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when
any door is opened. This will occur only after the vehicle
has been shifted into the PARK position after the vehicle
has been driven (shifted out of PARK and the doors
closed).
Auto Unlock Feature Programming
The Customer Programming sequence to disable or en-
able Auto Unlock:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all the doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt. (Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chiming that may be confusing during this
programming procedure.)
3. Insert the key into the ignition.
4. Within 15 seconds, cycle the key from the LOCK
position to the ON position and back to LOCK position,
a minimum of four times; ending in the LOCK position.
(Do not start the engine.)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
2
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door LOCK
switch in the UNLOCK direction.
6. A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has
been changed.
7. To reactivate the feature, repeat the above Steps.
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be changed. If necessary, repeat
the above procedure.
Child Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have the child-
protection door lock system.
Child Lock Lever
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To use the system, open each rear door, slide the lever up
to engage the locks, and down to disengage the child-
protection locks. When the system on a door is engaged,
that door can only be opened by using the outside door
handle, even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE:
•
After setting the child protection door lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the desired position.
•
For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
2
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The control on the left front door has up-down switches
that give you finger-tip control of all four power win-
dows. There is a single opening and closing switch on the
passenger doors for passenger window control. The
windows will operate when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON or ACC position, and for ten minutes after the
ignition is turned OFF or the driver’s door is opened.
Power Window Switch
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Auto Down (Driver’s Side Only)
The driver’s window switch has an Auto Down feature.
Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and
the window will go down automatically. To cancel the
Auto Down movement, operate the switch in either the
up or down direction and release the switch.
Window Lockout Switch
The Window Lockout Switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
Window Lockout button. To enable the window controls,
press the Window Lockout button a second time.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
Power Window Lockout Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
windows down or partially open. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs
with the rear windows open, open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, knee
bolsters, front airbags for both the driver and front
passenger, and if equipped left and right side curtain
airbags for the driver and passengers seated next to a
window. If you will be carrying children too small for
adult-size seat belts, your seat belts or the LATCH feature
(refer to the “Child Restraint” in this section), can be used
to hold infant and child restraint systems.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and that
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions, except the front center seating
position (with full bench seat), have combination lap/
shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to
lock during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature
allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with
you under normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt
will lock and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of
the vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
sengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch
Pulling Out Belt and Latch Plate
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
•
A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
•
A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
(Continued)
Latch Plate To Buckle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
2
WARNING! (Continued)
•
A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury and a belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
•
A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely
to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear
your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are
meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
Removing Slack From Belt
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
•
A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is
straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer and have
it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front and second row outboard seats, the shoulder
belt can be adjusted upward or downward to help
position the belt away from your neck. Push in on the
anchorage release button to release the anchorage, and
then move it up or down to the position that fits you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in the desired position.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The adjuster has an easy up (EZ Up) feature, which will
allow it to be moved up without engaging the button.
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode – If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is avail-
able on all passenger seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety
seat is installed in a passenger seating position. Children
12 years old, and younger, should be properly restrained
in the rear seat, whenever possible.
How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap/shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is fully extended.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode
To disengage the Automatic Locking Mode, disconnect
the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely. The vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking
mode is automatically activated.
Center Lap Belts
The center seat position on the front seat bench has a lap
belt only. To fasten the lap belt, slide the latch plate into
the buckle until you hear a “click.” To lengthen the lap
belt, tilt the latch plate and pull. To remove slack, pull the
loose end of the webbing. Wear the lap belt snug against
the hips. Sit back and erect in the seat, then adjust the belt
as tightly as is comfortable.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for front outboard seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove any slack from the seat belt system in the event of
a collision. These devices improve the performance of the
seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretension-
ers are single-use items. After a collision that is severe
enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners, both
must be replaced.
Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlertT)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within
60 seconds of starting the vehicle, and if the vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning
System (BeltAlertt) will alert the driver to buckle their
seat belt. The driver should also instruct all other occu-
pants to buckle their seat belts. If the driver unbuckles the
seat belt while the vehicle is in motion, an immediate
chime will be heard and, BeltAlertt will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 sec-
onds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. BeltAlertt
will be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
for more than 10 seconds, and the vehicle speed is greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
BeltAlertt can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer, or by following these steps:
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. Chrylser LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlertt.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait
for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off.
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle
and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least three
times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt
buckled.
4. Turn off the engine. A single chime will sound to
signify that you have successfully completed the
programming.
BeltAlertt can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although the BeltAlertt has been deactivated,
the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, your
authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt
extender. This extender should be used only if the
existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required,
remove the extender and store it.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
2
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use the
seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long
enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the extender when not needed.
Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) – Airbags
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag is mounted
in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment.
The words SRS/AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag
covers.
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
1 — Airbags
2 — Knee Bolsters
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
This vehicle may also be equipped with window bags to
protect the driver, and front and rear passengers sitting
next to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with window
bags, they are located above the side windows. Their
covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
WARNING!
•
Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags are no longer functional.
These protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflat-
ing.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do
not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to
block the location of the window bag. The area
where the window bag is located should remain
free from any obstructions.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
2
WARNING! (Continued)
•
If your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do
not have any accessory items installed that will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat
hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the
proper performance of the window bags.
Along with the seat belts, front airbags work with the
instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Window
bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions.
If your vehicle is so equipped, the window bag on the
crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate-to-
severe side collisions. But even in collisions where the
airbags work, you need the seat belts to keep you in the
right position for the airbags to protect you properly.
Here are some simple steps you can follow to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years and younger should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat, in an appropriate child re-
straint.
Infants, in rear-facing child restraints, should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front
airbag. An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or
death to infants in that position.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If a child between the ages of 1 and 12 years old, must
ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is
crowded, move the seat as far back as possible, and use
the proper child restraint. Refer to 9Child Restraint,9 in
this section.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts
properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the airbag room to inflate.
4. If your vehicle has window airbags, do not lean
against the door or window. Airbags will inflate force-
fully into the space between you and the door.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
Customer Center. Refer to 9If You Need Customer Assis-
tance9 in Section 9.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during airbag deployment could cause seri-
ous injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back,
comfortably extending your arms to reach the
steering wheel or instrument panel.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
2
WARNING! (Continued)
•
If the vehicle has window bags, they also need
room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or
window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
Airbag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller
•
Side Remote Acceleration Sensors – if equipped
•
Airbag Warning Light
•
Driver Airbag
•
Passenger Airbag
•
Window Bags above side windows – if equipped
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Interconnecting Wiring
•
Knee Impact Bolsters
•
Front Acceleration Sensors
•
Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
How the Airbag System Works
•
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are de-
signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation
from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC will not
detect rollover.
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or RUN position. These include all of the
items listed above, except the steering wheel and
column, and knee bolsters. If the key is in the OFF
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition,
the airbags are not on and will not inflate.
During a moderate-to-severe rear impact, the ORC may
only deploy the seat belt pretensioners.
•
Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warn-
ing light in the instrument cluster for six to
eight seconds for a self-check when the
ignition is first turned on. After the self-
check, the AIRBAG warning light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the AIRBAG warning light either momen-
tarily or continuously. A single chime will sound if the
light comes on again after initial start up.
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG warning light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
away.
NOTE: Children 12 years and younger should always
ride buckled up in a rear seat, in an appropriate child
restraint.
•
The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
2
may be possible based on collision severity and occu-
pant size. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper right side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size.
The bags fully inflate in about 50 - 70 milliseconds.
This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes.
The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger. The driver’s front
airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of
the airbag. The passenger’s front airbag gas is vented
through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this
way the airbags do not interfere with your control of
the vehicle.
•
The Side Impact SRS Window Bags are designed to
activate only in certain side collisions. When the ORC
(with side impact option) detects a collision requiring
the window bags to inflate, it signals the inflators on
the crash side of the vehicle.A quantity of nontoxic gas
is generated to inflate the window bag. The inflating
window bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner
out of the way and covers the window. The airbag
forcefully inflates in about one quarter of the time it
takes to blink your eye. Make sure you are seated and
belted properly and do not position items in the area
where the window bag inflates. This especially applies
to children. The window bag is only about 3-1/2 in
(9 cm) thick when it is inflated.
NOTE: At no time should any supplemental restraint
system (SRS)-component or SRS related component, or
fastener, be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by Chrylser LLC/Mopar.
•
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
the driver and the front passenger, and position every-
one for the best interaction with the front airbag.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If a Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy the airbags
when the impact sensors detect a moderate-to-severe
frontal collision, to help restrain the driver and front
passenger, and then immediately deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
If you do have a collision that deploys the airbags, any or
all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately. As the airbags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-
product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas
used for airbag inflation. These airborne particles may
irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin
or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For
nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the
irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufac-
turer’s instructions for cleaning.
•
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
2
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
and both front seat belt retractor assemblies (w/
pretensioners), replaced by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•
You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee bolsters.
(Continued)
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works
on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Enhanced Accident Response System
If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical
system remains functional, vehicles equipped with
power door locks will unlock automatically. In addition,
approximately five seconds after the vehicle has stopped
moving, the interior lights will light until the ignition
switch is turned off.
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in an impact. While
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
•
The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers
during the six to eight seconds when the ignition
switch is first turned on.
•
The light remains on or flickers after the six to eight
second interval.
•
The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param-
eters (see the following list) in an event data recorder,
prior to the moment of airbag deployment, or near
deployment, and up to a quarter-second of high-speed
deceleration data during, and/or after, airbag deploy-
ment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys,
or nearly deploys, and are otherwise unavailable.
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-
tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by Chrylser LLC, and others, to learn more about
the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries, in
order to assess and improve vehicle performance. In
addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrylser
LLC, such investigations may be requested by customers,
insurance carriers, government officials, and professional
crash researchers, such as those associated with univer-
sities, and with hospital and insurance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
Chrylser LLC (regardless of initiative), the company, or
its designated representative, will first obtain permission
of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle (usually
the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the elec-
tronic data stored, unless ordered to download data by a
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a warrant).
Acopy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity
upon request. General data, that does not identify par-
ticular vehicles or crashes, may be released for incorpo-
ration in aggregate crash databases, such as those main-
tained by the U.S. government and various states. Data of
a potentially sensitive nature, such as would identify a
particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confi-
dentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by
Chrylser LLC to any third party, except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrylser LLC
product
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
4. Otherwise required by law.
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
the airbag system
•
9Time9 of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
•
Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
•
Impact acceleration and angle
•
Seat belt status
•
Brake status (service and parking brakes)
•
Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
•
Engine control status (including engine speed)
•
Transmission gear selection
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
•
Cruise control status
•
Traction/stability control status
•
Tire pressure monitoring system status (if equipped).
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time - babies and children, too. Every state in the United
States, and all Canadian provinces, require that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. Children
12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in
a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat
owner’s manual to ensure you have the right seat for
your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child.
Infants and Small Children
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward facing: infant
carriers and 9convertible9 child seats.
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). 9Convertible9 child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the seat belt or the LATCH child
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
restraint anchorage system. (Refer to “LATCH - Child
Seat Anchorage System” in this section.)
•
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag
that does not have a switch to turn the airbag Off. An
airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death
to infants in this position.
Older Children and Child Restraints
•
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg), and who
are older than one year, can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and are
older than one year old. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the seat belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. (Refer to “LATCH - Child
Seat Anchorage System” in this section.)
•
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weigh-
ing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the seat cushion while
the child’s back is against the seatback, they need a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and booster
seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
•
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
against the seat back should use the lap/shoulder belt
in a rear seat.
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
2
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
•
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm.
For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
A rearward-facing infant restraint should only be
used in a rear seat of a vehicle that does not have
an airbag off switch. A rearward-facing infant
restraint in the front seat may be struck by a
deploying passenger airbag, which may cause se-
vere or fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. The manufacturer recommends that you
try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will
use it before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
•
The Extended Cab first, and Club/Crew Cab second
row outside seating positions, have cinching latch
plates. These are designed to keep the lap portion tight
around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to
use a locking clip. If the seat belt has a cinching latch
plate, pulling up on the shoulder portion of the
lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching
latch plate will keep the belt tight, however, any seat
belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt
occasionally and pull it tight, if necessary.
•
Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the
manufacturer’s instructions tell you.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
LATCH - Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren) — if equipped
Each vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing the child
restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps
from the child restraint to the vehicle structure. LATCH-
compatible child restraint systems are now available.
However, because the lower anchorages are to be intro-
duced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
also have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
2
connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail-
able for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child re-
straint in any vehicle.
Extended Cab
•
The Extended Cab front and right rear (if equipped
with a rear seat) passenger seating positions have
lower anchorages for LATCH-equipped child
restraints.
Crew Cab
•
The Crew Cab second row seat has lower anchorages
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-
compatible child seats having flexible, webbing-
mounted lower attachments at all three seating posi-
tions. Child seats with fixed lower attachments must
be installed in the outboard positions only. Regardless
of the specific type of lower attachment, NEVER install
LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats
share a common lower anchorage. If you are installing
LATCH-compatible child restraints in adjacent rear
seating positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or
the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard position, but
you must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the center
position.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible, you
can only install the child restraints using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Refer to “Installing the LATCH-Compatible
Child Restraint System” in this section.
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System — if equipped
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
LATCH Anchors
LATCH Anchors
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
2
were provided with the child restraint system. The rear
seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at the rear
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, and are
just visible when you lean into the vehicle to install the
child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your
finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat
cushion surfaces. In addition, there are tether strap
anchorages at each LATCH seating position (Refer to
“Child Restraint Tether Anchor” in this section.) Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-
facing toddler restraints, and some rear-facing infant
restraints, will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage, and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap. You will first
loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether
strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or
connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next, attach the
lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage
bars, pushing aside the seat cover material. Then, attach
the tether strap to the anchorage located on the back of
the seat, being careful to route the tether strap to provide
the most direct path between the anchor and the child
restraint. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear
head restraints, raise the head restraint and, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the two
posts. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat,
removing slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch-
ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
restraint, so that it should not be necessary to use a
locking clip. If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate,
pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder
belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will
keep the belt tight; however, any seat belt system will
loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull
it tight if necessary. If the seat belt has an automatic
locking retractor, it will have a distinctive label. Pull the
belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you
to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch
plate into the buckle. Then, pull the belt until it is fully
extended from the retractor. Allow the belt to return to
the retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion about the child restraint. For automatic
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
2
locking retractor seat belts, refer to 9Automatic Locking
Mode9 in this section. If you have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because, the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint, follow these steps. If the buckle is
webbing-mounted, disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt to shorten it.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release
button facing out. If the belt still can’t be tightened, the
buckle is not webbing-mounted, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the latch plate around, and insert the
latch plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make
the child restraint secure, try a different seating position
or use the locking clip provided with your child restraint.
To complete the child seat installation, refer to 9Child
Restraint Tether Anchor9 in this section.
Child Restraint Tether Anchor
The Extended Cab model has one routing strap
located behind the passenger side, rear out-
board seating position. The tether anchor itself
is located in the center of vehicle, in between
the two seating positions. The front outboard passenger
seating position is also equipped with a child tether
anchorage, located at the base of the front seatback.
When there is a rear seat delete option, the tether
anchorage located on the cab back panel is designed to be
used for the front seat center seating position. The Crew
Cab model has three anchorages located behind each of
the rear seating positions (rear left, rear center, and rear
right).
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
With a child restraint installed in the rear passen-
ger side locations, use care when adjusting the
front seat(s) rearward, to avoid the front seatback
coming in contact with the belted child directly
behind the seat. The child could be injured.
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be seriously injured or
killed. Make sure the child restraint tether strap is
always routed through the proper anchor strap
inner loop.
Tether Strap at the Front Passenger Seat (Extended
Cab)
1. Route the child restraint tether strap up and over the
front passenger seatback, and under the head restraint.
2. Connect the tether strap to the lower anchor.
3. Remove the slack in the tether strap so that it is pulled
tight.
Tether Strap
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
2
Tether Straps at the Rear Passenger Seat (Extended
Cab)
1. Route the child restraint tether strap through the
routing loop, located directly behind the child restraint.
The routing loops are located behind the flip-down door
on the cab back panel (padded bolster).
2. Route the tether strap across to the center tether
anchorage. The center tether is located behind the slide
door in the center of the vehicle, between the two seating
positions.
3. Remove the slack in the tether strap so that the anchor
strap is pulled tight.
Tether Strap Routing Loop
Tether Strap Routing
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Tether Straps at the Rear Passenger Seat (Crew Cab)
1. Route the child restraint tether strap under the head
restraint for the outboard seating positions, and then
through the anchor strap outer loop (webbing material
loop), located directly behind the child restraint.
2. Route the tether strap across to the nearest installed
anchor strap, and attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor strap inner metal ring.
3. Remove the slack in the tether strap so that both
anchor straps are pulled tight.
NOTE: Two anchors must be used for any of the three
seating positions.
Multiple Child Restraints
1 — Inner Anchor Strap Rings 4 — Passenger Side Rear Child
Seat
2 — Snap Hook 5 — Center Rear Child Seat
3 — Tether Strap 6 — Drivers Side Rear Child
Seat
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
2
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
seat failure and injury to the child. In a collision, the
seat could come loose and allow the child to crash
into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers, or
even be thrown from the vehicle. Use only the anchor
positions directly behind the child restraint to secure
a child restraint top tether strap. See your authorized
dealer for help, if necessary.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
shown under “Engine Oil”, under “Maintenance Proce-
dures” in section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT
OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust System
WARNING!
Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an ex-
tremely toxic gas that by itself is colorless and
odorless. To avoid inhaling these gases, the following
precautions should be observed:
•
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in
or out of the area.
•
It may be necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for more than a short period. If so,
adjust your climate control system to force outside air
into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed and the
controls in any position except Off or Recirculation.
•
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
Be aware of changes in the sound of the exhaust system,
exhaust fumes detected inside the vehicle, or damage to
the underside or rear of the vehicle. Have a competent
mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adja-
cent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections
could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
2
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace or adjust as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Heater Defroster Ducts
Inspect the heater defroster ducts for proper operation.
Check for proper airflow through all defroster ducts. If
there is any question regarding the operation of your
heater defroster ducts, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if
they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.) or if the front airbags have deployed. If there is any
question regarding seat belt or retractor condition, re-
place the seat belt.
Airbag Warning Light
The airbag warning light should come on, and remain on,
for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light is not lit during
starting, see your authorized dealer. If the light stays on,
flickers or comes on while driving, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer. If there is a problem
with the airbag warning light, the seat belt light will
flash.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The
Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for tread wear or uneven wear patterns.
Check for stones, nails, glass or other objects lodged in
the tread.
Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check wheel
nuts for tightness and tires for proper pressure.
Lights
Check the operation of all exterior lights. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
water, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if fuel fumes are
detected the cause should be located and corrected.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
m Mirrors .............................. 80
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror ................ 80
▫ Outside Mirrors....................... 80
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If
Equipped ........................... 80
▫ Power Mirrors ........................ 81
m Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt)—If
Equipped ............................. 82
▫ Operation ........................... 84
▫ Phone Call Features .................... 92
▫ UConnectt System Features .............. 95
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity ........... 100
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
UConnectt System.................... 101
▫ General Information................... 110
m Voice Recognition System (VR) —
If Equipped
.. 110
▫ Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation . . . 110
▫ Commands ......................... 112
▫ Voice Training ....................... 115
3
m Seats ............................... 115
▫ Manual Seat Adjustment ............... 115
▫ Front Seats Manual Seat Recliners ......... 116
▫ Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment — If
Equipped .......................... 117
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints — Front Seating
Positions ........................... 118
▫ Six-Way Power Seat Adjuster — Driver’s Side
Only.............................. 119
▫ Extended Cab/Crew Cabt Rear Seat ....... 120
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ............. 120
m To Open And Close The Hood ............. 121
m Lights .............................. 123
▫ Interior Lights ....................... 123
▫ Battery Saver........................ 124
▫ Headlight Delay ..................... 125
▫
Headlights, Parking Lights And Panel Lights
... 125
▫ Daytime Running Lights (Canada – Standard
And U.S. Fleet Vehicles) — If Equipped ..... 126
▫ Lights-On Reminder .................. 126
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped .............. 126
▫ Cargo Light — If Equipped ............. 126
▫ Multifunction Lever ................... 127
m Windshield Wipers And Washers ........... 129
▫ Windshield Wipers ................... 129
▫ Windshield Washers................... 131
76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
m Tilt Steering Column ................... 131
m Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped ...... 132
▫ To Activate ......................... 133
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed .............. 133
▫ To Deactivate ....................... 133
▫ To Resume Speed .................... 133
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting .............. 134
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ............... 134
m Overhead Console ..................... 135
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights ............... 136
m Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer . . . 136
▫ US/M Button ....................... 137
▫ Reset Button ........................ 137
▫ Step Button ......................... 138
▫ Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO) ........ 138
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) ............... 138
▫ Trip Odometer (ODO) ................. 139
▫ Elapsed Time (ET) .................... 139
▫ C/T Button ......................... 139
▫ Global Reset ........................ 140
▫ Compass/Temperature Display ........... 140
▫ Automatic Compass Calibration .......... 140
▫ Manual Compass Calibration ............ 141
▫ To Put Into a Calibration Mode ........... 141
▫ Outside Temperature .................. 142
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77
3
m Garage Door Opener — If Equipped ........ 142
▫ Programming HomeLinkt .............. 144
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming ..... 146
▫ Using HomeLinkt .................... 147
▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLinkt
Button ............................ 147
▫ Security ........................... 148
▫ Troubleshooting Tips .................. 148
▫ General Information................... 148
m Electrical Power Outlets ................. 149
▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
(Battery Fed Configuration) ............. 150
m Cupholders .......................... 150
m Rear Storage — If Equipped .............. 151
▫ Rear Convenience Storage Crates ......... 151
▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers ............ 153
m Floor Console — If Equipped ............. 154
▫ Floor Console Features ................. 154
m Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails ............. 155
m Rear Window Features .................. 156
▫ Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped ..... 156
▫ Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped ....... 157
m Slide-In Campers ...................... 157
▫ Camper Applications .................. 157
▫ General Information................... 158
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warning-Vehicles
Equipped With A Cap Or Slide-In Campers . . 158
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
Folding outside mirrors are hinged, and may be moved
either forward or rearward, to resist damage.
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel.
To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left
or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand
in the direction you want the mirror to move. When you
are finished adjusting the mirror, turn the control to the
center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror.
Power Mirror Switch
Mirror Directions
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
3
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the right-side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your right
side mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the
right-side mirror.
HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnectT)—
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code RER and REU radios contain an
integrated Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt)
system. Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for
UConnectt system operating instructions for these
radios.
UConnectt is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle
communications system. UConnectt allows you to dial a
phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., 9Call” { “Mike” {”Work9 or 9Dial”
{ “248-555-12129). Your cellular phone’s audio is trans-
mitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnectt system.
NOTE: The UConnectt system requires a cellular phone
equipped with the Bluetootht9Hands-Free Profile,9 Ver-
sion 0.96 or higher. See the UConnectt website for
supported phones.
NOTE: For UConnectt customer support, visit the
following websites:
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
•
www.dodge.com/uconnect
•
www.jeep.com/uconnect
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
or call 1–877–855–8400
UConnectt allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
The UConnectt system is driven through your
Bluetootht “Hands-Free profile” cellular phone.
UConnectt features Bluetootht technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to con-
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
UConnectt works no matter where you stow your cellu-
lar phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long
as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the
vehicle’s UConnectt system. The UConnectt system
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the
system. Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
Phone Button
The rearview mirror contains the microphone
for the system (depending on the type of
mirror and radio equipped), and either the
radio or the mirror has the two control buttons
(PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button)
that will enable you to access the system.
Voice Recognition Button
Actual button location may vary with radio.
The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The UConnectt system can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetootht cellular phone. See the
UConnectt website for supported phones. If your cellu-
lar phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset
Profile) you may not be able to use any UConnectt
features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the
phone manufacturer for details.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
3
The UConnectt system is fully integrated with the vehi-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnectt system
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnectt system such as 9CELL9 or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnectt
system and to navigate through the UConnectt menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnectt system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the 9Ready9 prompt or another
prompt.
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying 9Setup9 and then
9Phone Pairing,9 the following compound command
can be said: 9Setup Phone Pairing.9
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice com-
mand 9Phonebook New Entry,9 or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
9Phonebook9 and 9New Entry.9 Please remember, the
UConnectt system works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say 9Help9 following
the beep. The UConnectt system will play all the options
at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the UConnectt system from idle, simply press
the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for
directions. All UConnectt system sessions begin with a
press of the PHONE button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say 9Cancel9 and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) UConnectt System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnectt system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetootht enabled cellular phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. The
UConnectt website may also provide detailed instruc-
tions for pairing.
The following are general phone to UConnectt system
pairing instructions:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Phone Pairing.9
•
When prompted, after the beep, say 9Pair a Phone9 and
follow the audible prompts.
•
You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
3
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnectt system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, with 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnectt system. However, at any given time,
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnectt system. The priority allows the
UConnectt system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnectt
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to 9Advanced Phone
Connectivity9 in this section).
Dial by Saying a Number
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Dial.9
•
The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
•
For example, you can say 9234-567-89019.
•
The UConnectt system will confirm the phone num-
ber and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.9
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say 9John Doe,9 where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the UConnectt phonebook
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to 9Add Names to Your
UConnectt Phonebook,9 in the phonebook.
•
The UConnectt system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your UConnectt Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the UConnectt phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook New Entry.9
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and it is
recommended. For example, say 9Robert Smith9 or
9Robert9 instead of 9Bob.9
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
9Home,99Work,99Mobile,9 or 9Pager9). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
•
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
3
The UConnectt system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, UConnectt automatically
downloads mobile phone’s phonebook.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
transfer from Mobile phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
UConnectt automatically downloads names (text names)
and number entries from the mobile phone’s phonebook.
Specific Bluetootht Phones with Phone Book Access
Profile may support this feature. See UConnectt website
for supported phones.
•
To call a name from downloaded (or UConnectt)
Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a
Name” section.
•
Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the phone Bluetootht wireless connection is
made to the UConnectt. For example, after you start
the vehicle.
•
Maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the UConnectt.
•
Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, previous downloaded phonebook is available for
use.
•
Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
•
Only the Mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone-
book.
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the UConnectt. These can only be edited on
the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to UConnectt on the next phone connection.
Phonebook Download — Single Entry
If equipped and supported by your phone, UConnectt
allows the user to download entries from their phone via
Bluetootht. To use this feature, press the PHONE button
and say “Phonebook Download.” The system prompts,
“Ready to accept “V” card entry via Bluetootht…” The
system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from
your phone using the Bluetootht Object Exchange Profile
(OBEX). Please see your phone Owner’s Manual for
specific instructions on how to send these entries from
your phone.
NOTE:
•
The phone handset must support Bluetootht OBEX
transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
•
Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
are already connected to any system via Bluetootht,
and you may see a message on the phone display that
the Bluetootht link is busy. In this case, the user must
first disconnect or drop the Bluetootht connection to
the UConnectt system, and then send the address
book entry via Bluetootht. Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to
drop the Bluetootht connection.
•
If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it
will only use the first 24 characters.
Edit UConnectt Phonebook Entries
NOTE:
•
Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
3
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook Edit.9
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
•
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
•
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
9Phonebook Edit9 can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add ”John
Doe’s” work number later using the 9Phonebook Edit9
feature.
Delete UConnectt Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook Delete.9
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say 9List
Names9 to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
from the list, press the “Voice Recognition” button
while the UConnectt system is playing the desired
entry and say 9Delete.9
•
After you enter the name, the UConnectt system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, pager, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
•
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
Delete/Erase “All” UConnectt Phonebook Entries
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook Erase All.9
•
The UConnectt system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
•
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
•
Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
List All Names in the UConnectt Phonebook
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook List Names.9
•
The UConnectt system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-
book entries, if available.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
3
•
To call one of the names in the list, press the “Voice
Recognition” button during the playing of the desired
name, and say 9Call.9
NOTE: The user can also exercise 9Edit9 or 9Delete9
operations at this point.
•
The UConnectt system will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
•
The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnectt system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnectt system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnectt system will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. Press the PHONE button to accept the call. To reject
the call, press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
a single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the PHONE button to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The UConnectt system compatible phones in
the market today do not support rejecting an incoming
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user
can only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call While Current Call in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the “Voice Recognition” button and say 9Dial9 or
9Call9 followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
to 9Toggling Between Calls9 in this section. To combine
two calls, refer to 9Conference Call9 in this section.
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the PHONE button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
a double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the “Voice Recogni-
tion” button while a call is in progress, and make a
second phone call, as described under 9Making a Second
Call While Current Call in Progress.9 After the second call
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
3
has established, press and hold the PHONE button until
you hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the PHONE
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Redial.9
•
The UConnectt system will call the last number that
was dialed from your cellular phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
UConnectt system.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
UConnectt system after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the UConnectt system either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the UConnectt system and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the UConnectt system for a certain dura-
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the UConnectt system to the mobile phone.
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.
UConnectT System Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnectt system is
using:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnectt language change opera-
tion, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is
usable. The paired phone name is not language-specific
and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnectt system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Emergency9 and the UConnectt system will instruct
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
3
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE:
•
The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available cellular service
and area.
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press ‘Phone’ button and say
‘Setup’, followed by ‘Emergency’.
•
The UConnectt system does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the cell phone directly.
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
UConnectt system to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations, when the cell phone has
network coverage and stays paired to the UConnectt
system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Towing Assistance.9
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico).
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press ‘Phone’ button and say
‘Setup’, followed by ‘Towing Assistance’.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to 9Working with Automated
Systems.9 Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnectt system.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to 9Working
with Automated Systems.9
Working with Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your UConnectt system to access a voice
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
service or automated customer service line. Some ser-
vices require immediate response selection. In some
instances, that may be too quick for use of the UConnectt
system.
When calling a number with your UConnectt system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can press
the “Voice Recognition” button and say the sequence you
wish to enter, followed by the word 9Send.9 For example,
if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7
4 6 #), you can press the “Voice Recognition” button and
say, 93746#Send.9 Saying a number, or sequence of
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
3
numbers, followed by 9Send,9 is also to be used for
navigating through an automated customer service cen-
ter menu structure, and to leave a number on a pager.
You can also send stored UConnectt phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the “Voice Recognition” button and
say, “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the
name or number and say the name of the phonebook
entry you wish to send. The UConnectt system will then
send the corresponding phone number associated with
the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
NOTE:
•
You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
network configurations; this is normal.
•
Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Recognition” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is asking 9Would you like to pair a phone, clear
a{,9 you could press the “Voice Recognition” button and
say, 9Pair a Phone9 to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnectt sys-
tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Confirmations.9 The UConnectt system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cell phone, the UConnectt system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnectt. The status is given for roaming, net-
work signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnectt system (while dial-
ing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetootht cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnectt system will work the same
as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the UConnectt system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute Off)
When you mute the UConnectt system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnectt system:
•
Press the “Voice Recognition” button.
•
Following the beep, say 9Mute.9
In order to un-mute the UConnectt system:
•
Press the “Voice Recognition” button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
3
•
Following the beep, say 9Mute off.9
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnectt system allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your cellular phone to the UConnectt system
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your UConnectt paired cellular phone to the
UConnectt system or vice versa, press the “Voice Recog-
nition” button and say 9Transfer Call.9
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnectt System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively 9connected9
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetootht
connection between a UConnectt paired cellular phone
and the UConnectt system, follow the instructions de-
scribed in your cellular phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
•
When prompted, say 9List Phones.9
•
The UConnectt system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the “Voice Recogni-
tion” button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the
next two sections for an alternate way to “select” or
“delete” a paired phone.
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Select Another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the UConnectt system.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Select Phone9 and follow the prompts.
•
You can also press the “Voice Recognition” button at
any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone that you wish to select.
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
UConnectt system will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft [9 m]) the vehicle.
Delete UConnectt Paired Cellular Phones
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Phone Pairing.9
•
At the next prompt, say 9Delete9 and follow the
prompts.
•
You can also press the “Voice Recognition” button at
any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your UConnectT
System
UConnectt Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
PHONE button and say “UConnectt Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnectt
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
3
system Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce-
dures:
From outside the UConnectt mode (e.g., from radio
mode):
•
Press and hold the “Voice Recognition” button for five
seconds until the session begins, or,
•
Press the “Voice Recognition” button and say the
9Setup, Voice Training9 command.
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnectt system. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched OFF.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Recognition (VR)
•
For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least
1
⁄
2
in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
•
Performance is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather condition.
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
•
When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say 9Send.9
•
Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
•
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnectt phonebook.
•
Phonebook (Downloaded and UConnect Local) name
recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not
similar.
•
You can say 9O9 (letter 9O9) for 909 (zero). 98009 must be
spoken 9eight-zero-zero.9
•
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
3
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather conditions, and
•
operation from the driver’s seat.
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the UConnectt system.
•
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Bluetootht Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the UConnectt system. When this happens, the connec-
tion can generally be re-established by switching the
phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain
in Bluetootht ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a language change, you must
wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
3
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
return to main menu return or main menu
select phone select
send
set up phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
UConnectt Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
3
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (VR) — IF
EQUIPPED
Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation
This Voice Recognition System allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com-
mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions and all attention should be
kept on the roadway ahead. Failure to do so may
result in an accident causing serious injury or death.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When you press the VR hard-key, you will hear a beep.
The beep is your signal to give a command.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
options.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the VR hard-key, listen for the beep, and
say your command.
Pressing the VR hard-key while the system is speaking is
known as “barging in.” The system will be interrupted
and after the beep you can add or change commands.
This will become helpful once you start to learn the
options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words CANCEL,
HELP, or MAIN MENU.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are
listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the
disc menu or from the FM radio menu.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
dows are closed, and the heater/air-conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the VR hard-key
and say HELP or MAIN MENU.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
3
Commands
The Voice Recognition System understands two types of
commands. Universal commands are available at all
times. Local commands are available if the supported
radio mode is active.
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard-key.
2. Say a command (e.g., HELP).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the voice recognition
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for VR
is different then the audio system.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard-key. You may
say MAIN MENU to switch to the main menu.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
•
RADIO (to switch to the radio mode)
•
DISC (to switch to the disc mode)
•
MEMO (to switch to the memo recorder)
•
SYSTEM SETUP (to switch to system setup)
Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium
Wave - if equipped)
To switch to the AM band say AM or RADIO AM. In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
•
FREQUENCY (to change the frequency)
•
NEXT STATION (to select the next station)
•
PREVIOUS STATION (to select the previous station)
•
RADIO MENU (to switch to the radio menu)
•
MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band say FM or RADIO FM. In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
•
FREQUENCY (to change the frequency)
•
NEXT STATION (to select the next station)
•
PREVIOUS STATION (to select the previous station)
•
RADIO MENU (to switch to the radio menu)
•
MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode say SAT or SATELLITE
RADIO. In this mode, you may say the following com-
mands:
•
CHANNEL NUMBER (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
•
NEXT CHANNEL (to select the next channel)
•
PREVIOUS CHANNEL (to select the previous chan-
nel)
•
LIST CHANNEL (to hear a list of available channels)
•
SELECT NAME (to say the name of a channel)
•
RADIO MENU (to switch to the radio menu)
•
MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode say DISC. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•
TRACK (#) (to change the track)
•
NEXT TRACK (to play the next track)
•
PREVIOUS TRACK (to play the previous track)
•
MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
3
Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode say MEMO. In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
•
NEW MEMO (to record a new memo) — During the
recording you may press the VR hard-key to stop
recording. You proceed by saying one of the following
commands:
−
SAVE (to save the memo)
−
CONTINUE (to continue recording)
−
DELETE (to delete the recording)
•
PLAY MEMOS (to play previously recorded memos)
— During the playback you may press the VR hard-
key to stop playing memos. You proceed by saying one
of the following commands:
−
REPEAT (to repeat a memo)
−
NEXT (to play the next memo)
−
PREVIOUS (to play the previous memo)
−
DELETE (to delete a memo)
•
DELETE ALL (to delete all memos)
System Setup
To switch to system setup say “Setup”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•
Language English
•
Language French
•
Language Spanish
•
Tutorial
•
Voice Training
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the VR
hard-key first and wait for the beep, before speaking the
“barge in” commands.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnectt
system Voice Training feature may be used.
1. Press the VR hard-key, speak “System Setup” and once
you are in that menu then speak “Voice Training.” This
will train your own voice to the system and will improve
recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnectt System. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched OFF. This procedure may be repeated with a
new user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice
only.
SEATS
Manual Seat Adjustment
The adjusting lever is at the front of the seat, near the
floor. Lift the lever and move the seat to the desired
position. Release the bar to lock the seat into position.
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
3
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Front Seats Manual Seat Recliners
The front seats are equipped with recliners. The reclining
mechanism is operated by a lever located on the right
side of the passenger’s seat and the left side of the
driver’s seat. To recline, lean forward slightly before
lifting the lever, then push back to the desired position
and release the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to
return the seatback to its normal position. Using body
pressure, lean forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure the seatback is locked.
Adjusting Lever
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment — If
Equipped
The manual lumbar support rotary control adjustment is
located on the left side of the driver’s seat. Rotate the
knob to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar
support.
Recline Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
3
Adjustable Head Restraints — Front Seating
Positions
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down
on the restraints so that the upper edge is as high as
practical, at least to the level of the ears.
To lower the head restraint, depress the release button
located at the base of the head restraint and push down
on the head restraint.
Lumbar Adjustment
Adjustable Head Restraints
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Six-Way Power Seat Adjuster — Driver’s Side
Only
The power seat controls are located on the outboard side
of the driver’s seat cushion. Three switches control the
seat movement. The four-way switch in the center can be
moved forward, backward, up, or down to adjust for the
most comfortable position.
Up, Down, Forward, and Rearward
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
3
The seat angle can also be adjusted by using the two
toggle switches, tilting it up or down.
Extended Cab/Crew CabT Rear Seat
More cargo space is available by lifting up on the rear
seat cushion.
The Crew Cabt Rear Seat is a 60/40 split cushion and full
back. Either cushion can be raised, independently.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
The Heated Seat switches are located on the center of the
instrument panel.
Press the desired switch once to obtain high
heat level. Press the switch a second time to
obtain low heat level. A third button press will
turn off the heated seat.
If you do not purposefully turn the switch off, the seat
heating level will automatically change to the next lower
level, or off. Both the high and low heat levels, operate for
approximately 30 minutes. The heated seat will also turn
off when the ignition is turned OFF. Both indicators on
identifies high heat level. The lower indicator on identifies
Low heat level. Flashing indicator lights on the switch
indicate that the Heated Seat system needs servicing.
Tilt Adjustment
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
•
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. First pull the hood release lever located under the left
side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever Location
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
3
2. Then push the safety latch lever up while lifting the
grille with your hand. It is located at the bottom center of
the grille.
Lift the hood, and the gas filled props will hold it open.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center front
edge of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed,
with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before
driving.
Secondary Latch Location
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel next to the steering wheel.
Interior Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the right side of the switch) is rotated to the
second upward detent position, or if equipped, when the
UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter. When a door is open and the interior
lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the way
down to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to
go out. This is also known as the 9Party9 mode because it
allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of
time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odom-
eter, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
up until you hear a click. This feature is termed the
“Parade” mode and is useful when headlights are re-
quired during the day. If the dimmer control is not in this
position, the audio display may be difficult to read if the
headlights are on during the daytime.
Headlight Switch Location
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
3
NOTE: Club Cabt/Quad Cabt models may have an
optional switched dome lamp that is operated by press-
ing the lens.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, Load Shed-
ding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for
15 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated upwards for
15 minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery Saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
Dimmer Control
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlight on for
60 seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is
turned OFF while the headlight switch is on, and then the
headlight switch is cycled off. The headlights will remain
on for 60 seconds. Headlight delay can be cancelled by
either turning the headlight switch on then off, or by
turning the ignition ON.
Headlights, Parking Lights And Panel Lights
When the headlight switch is rotated to the first
position, the parking lights, taillights, side marker
lights, license plate light and instrument panel lights are
all turned on. The headlights will turn on when the
switch is rotated to the second position.
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight lenses
that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
3
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses.
Daytime Running Lights (Canada – Standard and
U.S. Fleet Vehicles) — If Equipped
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started, the transmission is out of the PARK
position and the parking brake is released. This provides
a constant 9lights on9 condition until the ignition is
turned OFF. The lights illuminate at less than normal
intensity. If the parking brake is applied or the transmis-
sion is in the PARK position, the Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) will turn off.
Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, courtesy lights or cargo
lights are left on, after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime
will sound when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The Fog Lights are turned on by placing the
headlight rotary control in the parking light or
headlight position and pushing on the headlight
rotary control. The fog lights will operate only when the
parking lights are on, or when the vehicle headlights are
on low beam. An indicator light located in the instrument
cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog
lights will turn off when the switch is pushed a second
time, also when the headlight switch is rotated to the off
position, or the high beam is selected.
Cargo Light — If Equipped
The cargo lights are turned on by pressing on the
CARGO button. The cargo lights will also turn on for
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
30 seconds when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is
pressed, as part of the illuminated entry feature.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Turn Signals
To operate the turn signals, move the multifunction lever
up to signal a right-hand turn or down to signal a
left-hand turn.
You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down.
Cargo Light Switch
Signaling Turns
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
3
The arrow on either side of the instrument cluster flashes
to indicate the direction of the turn, and proper operation
of the front and rear turn signal lights. If an indicator fails
to light when the multifunction lever is moved, it would
suggest that the switch or indicator lamp is defective.
If a defective bulb or wiring circuit is detected for the
turn signal system, the arrow indicators will flash at a
faster rate.
NOTE: If a turn signal has been left on for at least a mile
duration, a continuous chime will sound.
Turn Signal Auto-Mode
Tap the multifunction lever once and the turn signal (left
or right) will flash three times, and automatically turn off.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will turn on the high beam headlights
until the multifunction lever is released.
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch
Pull the multifunction lever fully toward the steering
wheel to switch the headlights from high or low beam.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Windshield Wipers
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the
multifunction lever. Turn the end of the multifunction
lever to select the desired wiper speed.
High Beam/Low Beam
Wiper/Washer Operation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
3
Intermittent Wiper System
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For
maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
into the upper end of the delay range.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
it enters the LO continual speed position. The delay can
be regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every two seconds. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km) or less.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
NOTE: If the front wiper is operating when the ignition
is turned off, the wiper will automatically return to the
9Park9 position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wipers
will resume operation.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push in on the washer knob on the end
of the multifunction lever and hold while spray is
desired. If the washer knob is depressed while in the
delay range, the wiper will operate for several seconds
after the washer knob is released. It will then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected. If the washer
knob is pushed, for a period greater than one second
while in the off position, the wiper will wipe approxi-
mately three wipes after the wash knob is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature will allow you to raise or lower the steering
wheel into a desired position. To tilt the column, pull
rearward on the lever below the turn signal control and
move the wheel up or down as desired. Push the lever
forward to lock the column firmly in place.
Tilt Steering Column Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
3
WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-
umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-
hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The control buttons for the Electronic Speed Control are
located on the steering wheel. When engaged, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control takes over the accelerator operation
at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — Resume 4 — Set
2 — Cancel 5 — Cruise
3 — Decel 6 — On/Off
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to the ON position. In the
instrument cluster, the word “CRUISE” illuminates to
indicate that the system is on.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control has been designed
to shut down if multiple speed control buttons (i.e., SET
and CANCEL) are operated simultaneously in order to
ensure proper operation. The Electronic Speed Control
can be reactivated by pushing the speed control ON/OFF
button and reestablishing the desired vehicle SET speed.
To Set At A Desired Speed
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
and release the SET button. Release the accelerator and
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Deactivate
Asoft tap on the brake pedal, normal braking, or pressing
the CANCEL button will deactivate the speed control
without erasing the memory. Pushing the ON/OFF but-
ton to the OFF position or turning off the ignition erases
the memory.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control ON when not
in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the
Electronic Speed Control to cause it to go faster than
you want. You could lose control and have an acci-
dent. Always leave the system OFF when you are not
using it.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push and release the
RESUME button. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
3
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control System is ON, the
speed can be increased by pressing and holding the
RESUME/ACCEL button. When the button is released, a
new set speed will be established.
Tapping the ACCEL button once will result in a speed
increase of 1 mph (2 km/h). Each time the button is
tapped, speed increases so that tapping the button three
times will increase speed by 3 mph (4.8 km/h).
Tapping the DECEL button once will result in a speed
decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h). Each time the button is
tapped, speed will decrease. For example, tapping the
button three times will decrease the speed by 3 mph
(4.8 km/h).
To decrease the speed while the Electronic Speed Control
is on, press and hold the DECEL button. Release the
button when the desired speed is reached, and the new
speed will be set.
To Accelerate For Passing
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
NOTE: When driving uphill, at elevations above 2,000 ft
(610 m), or when the vehicle is heavily loaded (especially
when towing) the vehicle may slow below the SET speed.
If the vehicle speed drops below 25 mph (40 km/h), the
Electronic Speed Control will automatically disengage. If
this happens, you can push down on the accelerator
pedal to maintain the desired speed.
Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may
exhibit several downshifts under the above conditions.
To reduce the frequency of the downshifts and to im-
prove vehicle performance, it is advisable to lock out
OVERDRIVE by pressing the TOW/HAUL button lo-
cated at the end of the shift lever.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control. An accident could be the result.
Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic
or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, or
slippery.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console has the following features:
•
Courtesy Lights
•
Garage Door Opener — if equipped
•
Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer — if
equipped
Overhead Console
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
3
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Near the front of the console are two courtesy/reading
lights.
Both lights illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is
opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the
courtesy light position (fully upward position), or when
the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter, if so equipped. These lights are
also operated individually as reading lights by pressing
the recessed area of the corresponding lens.
NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the vehicle is turned OFF, they will
extinguish after approximately 10 minutes.
COMPASS/TEMPERATURE MINI-TRIP COMPUTER
This feature allows you to choose between a compass/
temperature display and one of four trip conditions being
monitored.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
US/M Button
Use the US/M button to change the display from U.S. to
metric measurement units.
RESET Button
Use the RESET button to reset the following displays:
•
Average Fuel Economy
•
Trip Odometer
•
Elapsed time.
US/M Button
RESET Button
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
3
STEP Button
Use the STEP button to choose, or cycle through, the four
trip conditions.
Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO)
Displays the average fuel economy since the last reset.
Average fuel economy is a running average of the
amount of fuel used and the distance the vehicle has
traveled. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will
momentarily blank, the history will be erased, and the
AVERAGE WILL CONTINUE FROM WHERE IT WAS
BEFORE THE RESET. The reset value is based on a
minimal amount of fuel used and the distance traveled
from the previous drive cycle. The display may take
several miles/kilometers for this value to change, de-
pending upon driving habits.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. The estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level.
NOTE: The DTE is not resettable.
When Distance To Empty = LOW FUEL, the fuel gauge
pointer will initially be on the red “E” marker. At this
STEP Button
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
point (fuel gauge pointer on the red “E” marker), there is
reserve fuel capacity, which corresponds to approxi-
mately 8% of tank volume. This reserve capacity was put
in place to prevent the likelihood of customers running
out of fuel when operating at maximum load conditions
in areas where there aren’t many gas stations.
NOTE: The Distance To Empty will remain equal to zero
until the vehicle runs out of fuel or is refueled.
Trip Odometer (ODO)
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset.
NOTE: The maximum value is approximately
6000 miles (9656 km).
Resetting of this screen will cause the trip odometer to
change to zero. Then the trip odometer must be reset in
order to update the trip odometer miles.
Elapsed Time (ET)
This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time
since the last reset. Resetting the Elapsed Time will cause
the display to change to zero.
C/T Button
Use the C/T (Compass/Temperature) button to select a
readout of the outside temperature and one of eight
compass headings that indicate the direction in which the
vehicle is facing.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
3
Global Reset
If the RESET button is pressed twice within two seconds
while in any of the three resettable displays (AVG ECO,
ODO, ET), the GLOBAL RESET will reset all three
displays.
Compass/Temperature Display
WARNING!
Even if the display still reads a few degrees above 32°
F (0° C), the road surface may be icy, particularly in
woods or on bridges. Drive carefully under such
conditions to prevent an accident and possible per-
sonal injury or property damage.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating which eliminates the
need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the CAL
symbol will be displayed.
After completing one 360 degree turn with the vehicle
traveling less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in an area free from
large metal or metallic objects, the CAL symbol will turn
off and the compass will function normally.
C/T Button
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the Overhead Console. This is where the compass sensor
is located.
Manual Compass Calibration
NOTE: To ensure proper compass calibration, make
sure the compass variance is properly set before manu-
ally calibrating the compass.
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL symbol does
not appear, you must manually put the compass into the
“Calibration” mode.
To Put Into a Calibration Mode
Turn the ignition ON and set the display to “Compass/
Temperature.” Press and hold the RESET button to
change the display between VAR (compass variance) and
CAL (compass calibration) modes. When the CAL sym-
bol is displayed, complete one 360 degree turn in an area
free from large metal objects or power lines. The CAL
symbol will turn off and the compass will function
normally.
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set
according to the Compass Variance Map.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
3
To set the variance: Turn the ignition ON and set the
display to “Compass/Temperature.” Press and hold the
RESET button approximately five seconds. The last vari-
ance zone number will be displayed. Press the STEP
button to select the new variance zone and press the
RESET button to resume normal operation.
Outside Temperature
Because the ambient temperature sensor is located under
the hood, engine temperature can influence the displayed
temperature; therefore, temperature readings are slowly
updated when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(30 km/h) or during stop-and-go driving.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLinkt replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security
systems. The HomeLinkt unit operates off of your vehi-
cle’s battery.
The HomeLinkt buttons are located in the overhead
console, and contain one, two, or three dots/lines desig-
nating the different HomeLinkt channels.
Compass Variance Map
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: HomeLinkt is disabled when the Vehicle Theft
Alarm is active.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do not train
the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the
door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage
door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured after
1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these
safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information
or assistance.
HomeLink Buttons
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
3
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-
ous injury or death.
Programming HomeLinkT
Before You Begin
The Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) illuminates
the HomeLinkt symbol (a house with an arrow inside it)
along with 1, 2 or 3 indicators under it, when a
HomeLinkt button is pressed.
Pay attention to the indicator(s), as they will flash at
different rates, or remain solid during training.
If you have not trained any of the HomeLinkt buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds. Release the buttons when the indicators start
to flash.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed
to HomeLinkt, for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
while training.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) from the HomeLinkt buttons, while keeping the
HomeLinkt display in view.
For optimal training, point the battery end of the hand-
held transmitter away from the HomeLinkt.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Simultaneously, press and hold both the chosen
HomeLinktbutton and the hand-held transmitter button
until the indicator(s) change from a slow to a rapid flash
rate.
Then release both the HomeLinkt and hand-held trans-
mitter buttons.
It may take up to 30 seconds, or longer in rare cases. The
garage door may open & close while you train.
If the signal is too weak to train, replace the battery in the
original hand-held transmitter.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace Step #3 with procedures
noted in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming”
section.
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLinkt button. If
the indicator(s) blink rapidly for two seconds and then
remains constant, continue with the next section: Pro-
gramming A Rolling Code System.
NOTE: After training a HomeLinkt channel, if the
garage door does not operate with HomeLinkt and the
garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed
to the heading, “Programming A Rolling Code System.”
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “learn” or “training” button.
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is
NOT the button normally used to open & close the door).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
3
6. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “training”
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the “Learn” button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLinkt button twice (holding the button for 2 sec-
onds each time). If the device is plugged in and activates,
programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for 2 seconds) to complete the training.
If you are have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
To program the remaining two HomeLinkt buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLinkt to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process, to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLink,” Step 3, with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLinkt button,
while you press and release - every two seconds
(“cycle”), your hand-held transmitter until HomeLinkt
has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
indicator(s) will change from a slow flash, to a rapid
flash when trained.
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under, “Programming
HomeLinkt,” earlier in this section.
Using HomeLinkT
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLinkt button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.) The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLinkT Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
3
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkt button, for
20 seconds, until the indicator(s) starts to flash. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with PRO-
GRAMMING HOMELINKt, Step #2, and follow all
remaining steps.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons, for
20 seconds, until the indicators begin to flash. Note that
all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Theft Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLinkt, here
are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
•
Press the “Learn” button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for Rolling Code.
•
Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com, for information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term “IC” before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi-
cations were met.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
This vehicle has two 12-Volt auxiliary power outlets that
can provide up to 20-Amps of current for accessories
designed for use with standard power outlet adapters.
The outlets are located in the instrument panel (below the
temperature control setting knob) and inside the full -
size center console. When the optional Cigar Lighter
heating element is used, it heats when pushed in and
pops out automatically when ready for use. To preserve
the heating element, do not hold the lighter in the
heating position.
The instrument panel outlet can be reconfigured by the
customer to operate only when the ignition is ON (switch
battery fed) or with the ignition switch ON/OFF (battery
fed) to allow for cellular phone charging and/or opera-
tion while the ignition is OFF. This can be done by
moving the power outlet (switchable) fuse (fuse #22)
from the inboard position to the outboard position.
NOTE: All accessories connected to these outlets should
be removed or turned OFF when the vehicle is not in use,
to protect the battery against discharge (unless the cus-
tomer has reconfigured the fuse block to switched battery
feed).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
3
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine OFF (Battery
Fed Configuration)
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in, draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Use these only inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CUPHOLDERS
If your vehicle has bucket seats with a center console,
there are three cupholders located on the console.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A two-cavity cupholder is available on all Crew Cabst,
with rear seats mounted on the floor.
REAR STORAGE — IF EQUIPPED
Rear Convenience Storage Crates
The rear convenience storage crates are located under the
rear seat lower cushion and consist of two removable,
collapsible storage crates.
Front Cup Holders – Crew Cabt Rear Cup Holders – Crew Cabt
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
3
WARNING!
Do not sit or stand on this crate. It may collapse
causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Do not lift up on the “End Flaps” to open the crate,
damage to the “End Flaps” may occur.
NOTE: The maximum loading capacity for the small
crate is 30 lbs (13.6 kg) (and 50 lbs (22.6 kg) for the large
crate.
To open the storage crate, lift upwards on the crate
handles, and engage the crate end flaps.
To remove the crate, press on the release lever and lift up
on the crate.
Open Crate
1 — Crate Handles
2 — Crate End Flaps
3 — Release Lever
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To install the crate into the base, insert the crate into the
inboard slot and push down on the outboard side of the
crate, and snap into place.
To collapse the crate, push the crate end flaps inward to
disengage. Push the sides inward and snap into the base.
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers
Retainer hooks, which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles, are built into the back panel of the cab.
Insert Crate
Grocery Bag Retainers
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
3
FLOOR CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED
Floor Console Features
The Floor Console between the driver’s and front pas-
senger’s seat has the following features:
•
Miscellaneous storage compartments.
•
Three cupholders (two removable).
•
iPod/Phone storage bin.
•
12-Volt power outlet inside storage compartment.
•
Side open armrest lid.
•
Tissue holder and two pen holders.
•
Coin slots (located under the instrument panel center
stack).
Storage Compartments
Some miscellaneous storage compartments and cuphold-
ers are both removable and dishwasher safe (upper rack
of dishwasher only) for cleaning purposes. Various stor-
age compartments provide versatile and useful storage.
A coin holder is also provided inside the driver side
storage bin.
Power Outlet and Portable Phone Storage
The console is equipped with a power outlet and an
iPod/phone storage bin. The phone storage bin can be
used when easy access to the phone is needed. Also, the
power outlet inside the console compartment can be used
to charge the phone while it is being stored in the bin. The
power outlet may be used for any portable item with a
standard 12-Volt power plug.
Side Open Armrest Lid
Pressing the button on the left side of the console opens
the console armrest lid. The armrest lid will remain open
until the armrest lid is closed manually, by pressing the
lid back into place. Two pen holders are provided on the
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
inside of the armrest lid. A tissue holder is also provided
on the inside of the armrest lid, which holds a pocket-size
soft pack of tissue.
REAR CARGO AREA UTILITY RAILS
CAUTION!
The maximum load per cleat should not exceed
320 lbs (145 kg) and the angle of the load on each
cleat should not exceed 60 degrees above horizontal,
or damage to the cleat or cleat rail may occur.
There are four adjustable cleats that can be used to assist
in securing cargo. Each cleat must be located and tight-
ened down in one of the detentes, along either rail, in
order to keep cargo properly secure.
To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn the nut
counterclockwise, approximately three turns. Then pull
out on the cleat and slide it to the detent nearest the
desired location. Make sure the cleat is seated in the
detent and tighten the nut.
1 — Utility Rail Cleat
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Detent
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
3
To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove the end
cap by pushing up on the locking tab, located on the
bottom of the end cap. Slide the cleat off the end of the
rail.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped
CAUTION!
Use care when washing the inside of the rear window
to prevent damage to heating elements. Use a soft
cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Also, keep all objects a safe
distance from the window to prevent damaging the
heating elements.
A pushbutton type switch is located on the right
side of the Air Conditioning and Heater Control,
below the A/C (snowflake) button. Pressing the switch
will turn on the Rear Window Defroster. A light above the
Rear Window Defroster symbol will illuminate to indi-
cate the Rear Window Defroster is on. Pushing the button
a second time will turn the Rear Window Defroster off
Utility Rail End Cap
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
prior to the time-out. The Rear Window Defroster will
turn off automatically after 15 minutes from the first
activation, and 10 minutes after the second activation, all
within the same ignition cycle. To prevent excessive
battery drain, use the rear defroster only when the engine
is running.
Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
A locking device in the center of the window helps to
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the
lock to release the window.
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS
Camper Applications
Certain truck models are not recommended for slide-in
campers. To determine if your vehicle is excluded, please
refer to the Consumer Information Truck-Camper Load-
ing document, located in your Owner’s Manual packet or
Sliding Rear Window Latch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
3
available from your authorized dealer. For safety reasons,
follow all instructions on this important document.
General Information
The Manufacturer’s Warranty does not apply to body
modifications and special equipment, such as a camper
unit, heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc., supplied by
manufacturers other than Chrysler LLC. For warranty
coverage and service on these items, contact the appli-
cable manufacturer.
To mount a camper unit with an overhang, the tailgate
can be removed. Unlatch the tailgate and remove the
support cables from the retainer pins. Raise the right side
of the tailgate until the lower right side pivot clears the
hanger bracket. Then slide the tailgate to the right to
remove.
Carbon Monoxide Warning-Vehicles Equipped
With A Cap or Slide-In Campers
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly, the
exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap or
Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the overhang-
ing camper compartment and be free of leaks.
TAILGATE
Tailgate Removal
To simplify mounting a camper unit with an overhang,
the tailgate can be removed quickly. Follow these steps:
1. Open the tailgate to a 45 degree angle.
2. Unclip and remove the cables from the box while
maintaining a 45 degree angle.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Lift the tailgate off of the pivot on the passenger side
by pulling upward and rearward at the same time.
4. Slide the tailgate to the passenger side while making
sure clearance from the box and taillight is maintained.
To reinstall the tailgate, do the following:
1. Slide the tailgate onto the driver’s side pivot.
2. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle and insert it into
the passenger side pivot.
3. Clip the cables to the box.
Two–Position Tailgate/Upper Load Platform
Your tailgate can be opened to the full-open or the
partial-open position. The partial-open position is for
loading objects longer than the length of the bed (sheets
of plywood, etc.) by creating an upper load platform:
Installing Lumber
1. Place lumber across the box in the indentations pro-
vided above the wheel housings and in the bulkhead
dividers, to form the floor. There are indents in the sheet
metal (or bed liner if equipped) on the inner side of the
box in front (Club Cabt only) and behind both wheel
housings.
Tailgate Cable
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
3
2. Secure the tailgate in the partially-open position:
3. Open the tailgate slightly.
4. Snap the tailgate support cable between the cable
guide and the tailgate bumper. Do this on both sides of
the tailgate.
1 — Bulkhead Divider Slot
2 — Wheel Housing Indentions
Tailgate Guide
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To return the tailgate to the full-open position:
1. Lift up on the tailgate.
2. Remove both cables from between the cable guides
and the tailgate bumpers, and lower the tailgate.
CAUTION!
•
Care should always be exercised when operating a
vehicle with cargo. Vehicle speeds may need to be
reduced. Severe turns or rough roads may cause
shifting or bouncing of the cargo that may result in
vehicle damage.
•
Ensure the load is securely tied down and is
properly identified according to local laws if it
extends beyond the tail lights.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Loading should not exceed 400 lbs (181 kg) of
material suspended above the wheelhouse and
partially open tailgate or vehicle damage may
result.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
m Instruments And Controls ................ 166
m Instrument Cluster ..................... 167
m Instrument Cluster Description ............ 168
m Electronic Digital Clock ................. 179
▫ Clock Setting Procedure ................ 179
m Sales Code REQ — AM/FM Stereo Radio And
6–Disc CD/DVD Changer (MP3/WMA AUX
Jack)................................ 180
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode ....... 180
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 189
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files ........ 191
▫ List Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA
Play) ............................. 193
▫ Info Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA
Play) ............................. 193
m AM/FM/CD/DVD Multimedia System Radio
(RER/REN) – If Equipped ................ 196
▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) — If Equipped ............. 196
4
▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnectt)—
If Equipped......................... 196
▫ Clock Setting Procedure ................ 196
m Sales Code RES — AM/FM Stereo Radio With
CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack)................ 198
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ...... 199
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play.................. 202
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............. 204
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode .... 207
m Sales Code RES/RSC — AM/FM Stereo Radio
With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) And Sirius
Radio............................... 207
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ...... 208
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play.................. 214
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............. 216
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 218
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 219
m Sound Box Operation ................... 220
m Satellite Radio — If Equipped
(REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU Radios Only)..... 221
▫ System Activation .................... 221
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID) ......... 221
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode ................ 222
▫ Satellite Antenna ..................... 222
▫ Reception Quality .................... 223
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Mode .... 223
▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone
(If Equipped)........................ 226
▫ Operating Instructions — Video
Entertainment System (VES)™
(If Equipped)........................ 226
m Remote Sound System Controls —
If Equipped........................... 226
▫ Radio Operation ..................... 227
▫ CD Player .......................... 227
m CD/DVD Maintenance .................. 227
m Radio Operation And Cellular Phones ....... 228
m Climate Controls ...................... 228
▫ Air Conditioning And Heater ............ 229
▫ Operating Tips ...................... 232
▫ Operation Tips Chart .................. 234
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
4
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
1 - Headlight Switch 6 - Glove Compartment 11 - Transfer Case Switch*
2 - Air Outlets 7 - Radio 12 - Speed Control Switches
3 - Demister Outlets 8 - Climate Controls 13 - Hood Release
4 - Instrument Cluster 9 - Power Outlet 14 - Parking Brake Release
5 - Airbags 10 - Heated Seat Switches* * If Equipped
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION
1. Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when ignition switch is in the ON position.
2. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily. The
gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature
when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or
when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the en-
gine running as you would not be able to react to the
temperature gauge if the engine overheats.
3. Turn Signal Indicators
When a turn signal is activated, a right-pointing or
left-pointing arrow lights up and flashes to indicate the
direction of the turn. These indicators also indicate
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
If either indicator flashes at a faster rate than normal,
check for a defective bulb. If either indicator fails to light
up when the lever is moved, check for a defective fuse or
turn signal LED. A single chime is activated when the
left/right turn signal is left on, with the vehicle speed
greater than 15 mph (24 km/h) for more than one mile.
4. Low Fuel Warning Light
The low fuel warning light will illuminate when the
fuel gauge reads 1/8 of a tank or less. There is a
pointer on the side of this symbol that indicates the
side that your fuel filler door is located.
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. High Beam Indicator
The high beam indicator will illuminate if the
headlights are on high beam.
6. Seat Belt Reminder Light
The seat belt reminder light will illuminate for
several seconds after the ignition is turned ON as
a reminder to “buckle up.” This light will remain
on as long as the seat belt remains unbuckled. If this light
flashes, it indicates a fault in the seat belt system. Have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
7. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-
proaches H (Hot), this indicator will illuminate
and a single chime will sound after reaching a set
threshold. Further overheating will cause the tempera-
ture gauge to pass H (Hot), the indicator will continu-
ously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the
engine is allowed to cool.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature light is on,
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
in neutral with the air conditioner turned off until
the light turns off. If the light remains on, turn the
engine off immediately, and call for service.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
4
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7 of this manual. Follow
the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap
paragraph.
8. Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle’s speed.
9. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
rized dealer.
10. Vehicle Security Light
The vehicle security light will flash rapidly for approxi-
mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is
arming. The light will flash at a slower speed continu-
ously after the alarm is set. The security light will also
come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first
turned ON.
11. Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will illuminate when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the ON position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not illuminate when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
12. Oil Pressure Warning Light
The Oil Pressure Warning Light illuminates when
the engine oil pressure has become too low. For a
bulb check, this light will come on momentarily when the
ignition is turned ON. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as
possible. Immediate service should be obtained.
13. Tachometer
The tachometer gauge measures engine revolutions-per-
minute (rpm x 1000).
14. Shift Lever Indicator
The electronic shift lever indicator is self-contained
within the instrument cluster. It displays the position of
the automatic transmission shift lever, and the relation of
each position to all other positions. The display will place
a box around the selected transmission range (PRND21).
If the PRNDL displays only the characters PRND21 (no
boxes), have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
15. Trip Odometer
The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. To
switch from odometer to trip odometer, press and release
the trip odometer button.
To reset a trip odometer, display the trip odometer then
push and hold the button until the display resets (ap-
proximately two seconds).
The odometer will also display messages such as: door
ajar, low wash, No-fuse, Lo Tire (display will toggle
between Lo and Tire for three cycles - if equipped),
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
4
CHAngE OIL and the outside temperature on vehicles
that are not equipped with the Overhead Console with
Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer.
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged,
“GASCAP” will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odom-
eter RESET button to turn the “GASCAP” message off. If
the problem continues, the message will appear the next
time the vehicle is started.
Change Oil Message
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “CHAngE OIL” message will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the fol-
lowing procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
16. Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. There-
fore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
be determined.
17. Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
The fog light indicator shows when the fog lights
are ON.
18. Transmission Temperature Indicator
This light indicates that there is excessive trans-
mission fluid temperature, that might occur
with severe usage such as trailer towing. If this
light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle
or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL, until the
light goes off.
19. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) – If Equipped
The Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) light
informs you of a problem with the ETC system.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on
while the engine is running. If the light remains
lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be
drivable, however, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine
is running, immediate service is required and you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle
or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing. The
light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON
and remain on for 15 seconds as a bulb check. If the light
does not come on during starting, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
4
20. Brake System Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) sys-
tem. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to
the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during
each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi-
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
21. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) that
monitors the emissions and engine control sys-
tem. If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing, the light
will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and
remain on, as a bulb check, until the engine is started. If
the vehicle is not ready for emissions testing, the light
will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and
remain on for 15 seconds, then blink for 5 seconds, and
remain on until the vehicle is started. If the bulb does not
come on during starting, have the condition investigated
promptly.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
4
If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it
suggests a potential engine control problem and the need
for system service.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see an authorized dealer for service as soon
as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability.
If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If
Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly, when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
4
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
23. Airbag Warning Light
The airbag warning light will illuminate and
remain lit for six to eight seconds when the
ignition is first turned ON. If the light does not
illuminate when the ignition is first turned ON,
or the light stays on or comes on while driving, have the
airbag system checked by an authorized dealer.
24. 4WD Indicator
The 4WD indicator illuminates when the transfer case is
in 4WD position.
25. SVC (Service) 4WD Indicator
The SVC 4WD illuminates when the ignition key is
turned to the ON position and will stay on for two
seconds. If the light stays on or illuminates during
driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning
properly and that service is required.
26. Cruise Indicator
The cruise indicator illuminates when the electronic
speed control system is turned on.
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
27. Cargo Light
The Cargo Light indicator will illuminate when the Cargo
Light is activated by pressing the CARGO LIGHT button,
located on the headlight switch.
28. TOW/HAUL
The TOW/HAUL button is located at the end of the gear
shift lever. This light will illuminate when the TOW/
HAUL button has been selected.
29. 4WD LOW Indicator
The 4WD Low indicator illuminates when the transfer
case is in 4WD LOW position.
30. Odometer/Trip Odometer Button
Press the ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER button to
toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer
display. Holding the button in, resets the trip odometer
reading.
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK
The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
the radio. A digital readout shows the frequency and/or
time in hours and minutes (depending on your radio
model), whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or
ACC position.
When the ignition switch is in the OFF position, or when
the radio frequency is being displayed, timekeeping is
accurately maintained.
On the AM/FM/CD (6-disc) radio, the time button
alternates the location of the time and frequency on the
display. On the AM/FM/CD (single-disc) radio, only one
of the two, time or frequency, is displayed.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/AUDIO con-
trol knob.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
4
3. After the hours are adjusted, push the TUNE/AUDIO
control knob to set the minutes.
4. Adjust the minutes by turning the TUNE/AUDIO
control knob.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait approximately
five seconds.
SALES CODE REQ — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX
JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
REQ Radio
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
Voice Recognition Button (UConnectt Hands-Free
Phone) — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnectt) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnectt)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
4
Phone Button (UConnectt Hands-Free Phone) — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnectt) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnectt)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In
AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch
between the time and frequency displays.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save the time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
this display follow the above procedure, starting at
step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
4
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
No program type or un-
defined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues SoftR&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.
•
DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped).
•
DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
•
DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following:
•
Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
available on the disc (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
4
•
Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (if equipped).
•
Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
equipped).
NOTE:
•
The available selections for each of the above entries
varies depending upon the disc.
•
These selections can only be made while playing a
DVD.
•
VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and
OFF (if equipped).
•
VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if
equipped).
•
VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the
mode of either the IR1 or IR2, wireless headphones by
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
•
Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.
•
Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
user to scroll through the following items, and set
defaults according to customer preference.
Menu Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
language not listed, then scroll down and select 9other.9
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
number and then push to select.
Audio Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting 9other.9 Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting 9other.9 Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitles — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
Off or On.
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
dynamic range. The default is set to 9High,9 and under
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
setting is 9Normal.9
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
4
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
customer-preferred settings.
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes.
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of five times.
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
9INSERT DISC,9 insert the CD into the player.
Radio display will show 9LOADING DISC9 when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
4
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
display will show 9EJECTING DISC9 when the disc is
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD, MP3/MWA modes.
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
Switches the Radio into the AM or FM Radio mode.
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3/WMAfiles; however, acceptable
MP3/WMAfile recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders: 100
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator 9.9 and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator 9.9 and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as 9keep
disc open after writing9 are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
4
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause play-
back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
WMA
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
WMA 44.1 and 48
48, 64, 96, 128,
160, 192 VBR
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to 9elapsed
time9 priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
4
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to 9elapsed time9 display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
display for five seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) (If Equipped)
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
Section 3.
For UConnectt “Voice Recognition System (VR),” refer to
“Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt)” in Section 3.
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
(UConnectt) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Satellite Radio” in this section.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)™
Guide.”
Dolbyt
Manufactured under license from Dolbyt Laboratories.
9Dolbyt9 and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolbyt Laboratories.
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited
DTS™
9DTS™9 and 9DTS™ 2.09 are trademarks of Digital The-
ater Systems, Inc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
4
AM/FM/CD/DVD MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM RADIO
(RER/REN) – IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
The REN and RER Multimedia systems contain a radio,
CD/DVD player, USB port, a 20-gigabyte hard drive
(HDD), and a “JukeBox” (virtual CD changer). Sirius
Satellite Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch
screen allows for easy menu selection.
The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System
(GPS)-based Navigation system.
Refer to your Multimedia system (REN) or Navigation
(RER) user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) — If Equipped
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnectT) — If Equipped
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt)” in
Section 3.
Clock Setting Procedure
Global Positioning System (GPS) — RER only
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the
worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s
clock very accurate, once the appropriate time zone and
daylight savings information is set.
To Manually Set the Clock — RER/REN
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
ward is displayed.
4. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
5. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
played to change the current setting.
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the multimedia system is
turned off. Proceed as follows to change the current
setting:
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
4
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
SALES CODE RES — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
RES Radio
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the On/Volume control knob to turn on the radio.
Push the On/Volume control knob a second time to turn
off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the On/Volume control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In
AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch
between the time and frequency displays.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button, until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/Scroll
control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side Tune/
Scroll control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
4
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Scroll
control knob. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob to save
time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the Tune/Scroll control to select SET
CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, starting at
Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio,
press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to
increase, or counterclockwise to decrease, the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob and BASS will
display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to the right or
left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a second time
and MID will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range
tones.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a third time and
TREBLE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fourth time
and BALANCE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control
knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the
right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fifth time and
FADE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to
the left or right to adjust the sound level between the
front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob again to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
4
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD, MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
4
RW/FF
Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of
the current CD track/title.
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator 9.9 and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator 9.9 and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as 9keep disc open after
writing9 are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
4
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If theAUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
SALES CODE RES/RSC — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND
SIRIUS RADIO
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
4
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the On/Volume control knob to turn on the radio.
Push the On/Volume control knob a second time to turn
off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
On/Volume control knob to the right increases the vol-
ume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
RES/RSC Radio
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Voice Recognition System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in Section 3.
Voice Recognition Button (UConnectt Hands-Free
Phone) — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnectt) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnectt)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button (UConnectt Hands-Free Phone) — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnectt) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnectt)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In
AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch
between the time and frequency displays.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button, until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/Scroll
control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side Tune/
Scroll control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
4
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Scroll
control knob. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob to save
time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the Tune/Scroll control to select SET
CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, starting at
Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio,
press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob and BASS will
display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to the right or
left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a second time
and MID will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range
tones.
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a third time and
TREBLE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fourth time
and BALANCE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control
knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the
right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fifth time and
FADE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to
the left or right to adjust the sound level between the
front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob again to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the Tune/Scroll control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
No program type or un-
defined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
4
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
•
Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tune/Scroll control knob to adjust the minutes. Press
the Tune/Scroll control knob again to save changes.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
4
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD, MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of
the current CD track/title.
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
4
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-
dom Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator 9.9 and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator 9.9 and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as 9keep disc open after
writing9 are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
4
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the Tune/Scroll control knob. Selecting a folder
by pressing the Tune/Scroll control knob will begin
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
playing the files contained in that folder (or the next
folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to 9elapsed
time9 priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to 9elapsed time9 display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If theAUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
4
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
(UConnectt) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Satellite Radio” in this section.
SOUND BOX OPERATION
The Sound Box includes one subwoofer, two tweeters
and lights that pulsate with the music.
The lights can be: turned off, on constantly, or pulse with
the beat of the music. To control the lights, select one of
the following three positions:
Sound Box
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Switch
Position
Light Operation
1
Pulse (right/passenger side) position – In
this position the sound is active and the
lights will pulse with the music.
2
Pulse off/light off (center) position – In this
position the sound is active but the lights
will be turned off.
3
Constant (left/driver side) position – In this
position the sound is active and the lights
will remain on constantly.
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
(REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU RADIOS ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account at no addi-
tional charge. For further information, call the toll-free
number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at
www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Cana-
dian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
4
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES Radios
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the Tune/Scroll control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
ESN/SID Access With REU Radio
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center
of the radio to scroll to Subscription, and then press and
release the joystick. All of the ESNs that apply to your
vehicle will display.
Selecting Satellite Mode
Press the SAT button until 9SAT9 appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to
the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped).
Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the
antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger lug-
gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not
place items directly on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions — Satellite Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button (When Equipped)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
INFO Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
4
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
INFO Button — REU Radio
Pressing the INFO button will display information about
Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Pressing
the INFO button again will close the INFO screen.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the Tune/Scroll control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — REU Radio
Pressing this button provides a MUSIC TYPES list from
which you can make a selection. Once a selection is
made, you can seek up, or down, or scan the channels
and the radio will tune to the next station matching the
selected format. There is no time-out for this screen.
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the
MUSIC TYPE screen. Once closed, seek up, seek down,
and scan will no longer be based on your selection.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
•
Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
4
Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions — Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)™
Guide.”
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. Pressing the top of the switch will
increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
The button located in the center of the right hand control
will switch modes to Radio or CD.
Remote Sound System Controls
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left hand control
is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand control
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set push-buttons.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch changes
CD’s on the 6–Disc in-dash CD changer radio. This
button does not function for all other radios.
CD/DVD MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
4
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e. scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have theft protection encoding. Try a
known good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being ON in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The controls for the heating, ventilation and air condi-
tioning system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary
knobs. These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired
interior conditions.
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Conditioning And Heater
Air Conditioning And Heater Operation
To turn on the air conditioning, set the fan control at any
speed and press the SNOWFLAKE button located at the
right of the control panel. Conditioned air will be di-
rected through the outlets selected by the mode control.
A light at the top of the SNOWFLAKE button shows that
the air conditioning is on. Press the button a second time
to turn the air conditioning off.
Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed
when the air conditioning compressor is on. This is a
normal occurrence as the compressor will cycle on and
off to maintain comfort and increase fuel economy.
The Mode Control (at the right of the
control panel) can be set in any of the
following positions:
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between
the major modes. These intermediate positions are iden-
tified by the small dots.
Air Conditioning and Heater Control
Mode Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
4
Recirculation Modes (Panel or Bi-Level )
Select the recirculation modes when
the outside air contains dust, odors,
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is
desired. This feature allows for recir-
culation of interior air only. Air flows
either through the panel outlets or
both the panel and floor outlets to-
gether, depending on which recirculation mode is
selected.
Panel (Fresh Air Modes)
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel.
Bi-Level
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel and at the floor.
Floor
Outside air flows primarily through the floor out-
lets located under the instrument panel.
Mix
Outside air flows in equal proportions through the
floor and defroster outlets.
Defrost
Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield
through the defroster outlets located at the base of
the windshield, and the demister outlets located at the
edge of each side of the instrument panel.
NOTE: The air conditioner compressor operates in both
Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes, even if the
A/C button has not been pressed. This dehumidifies the
air to help dry the windshield.
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blower Control
The rotary knob on the left of
the control panel is the
Blower Control. Turn the
knob clockwise to one of the
four positions to obtain the
blower speed you desire. To
turn the blower off, turn the
knob to the far left position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.
Temperature Control
The rotary knob at the center
of the control panel controls
the temperature of the inte-
rior air. You can choose your
degree of comfort by rotating
the knob. The coldest tem-
perature setting is to the ex-
treme left (blue region) and
the warmest setting is to the
extreme right (red region) of
the rotation.
Circulation
The cab is designed with features to promote outside air
circulation. There are grilles in the cab back panel. These
are air exhausters that provide the means for regular
exchange of cab air.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
4
Side window demisters direct airflow specifically to the
window glass to help prevent interior fogging of the
glass. They are located in the extreme outside upper
edges of the instrument panel. The demisters also pro-
vide extra air ducts for circulation. They are in operation
whenever the Floor, Mix, Defrost, or Bi-Level modes are
in use.
NOTE: When you turn off the engine you may hear a
hissing sound from under the hood for a short period of
time. This is a normal condition that occurs if the air
conditioning system has been on. It is not an indication of
a problem with the air conditioning system.
Operating Tips
Fast Cooldown
For a fast cooldown, open the windows and turn the
blower fan rotary knob to the extreme right position, turn
the mode control to the panel fresh position, press the
SNOWFLAKE button to turn on the air conditioning, and
drive with the windows open for the first few minutes.
Once the hot air has been expelled, close the windows
and turn the mode selector to the Recirculation Panel
Mode or Recirculation Mode Bi-level position. When a
comfortable condition has been reached, choose a mode
position and adjust the temperature control knob and
blower speed as necessary to maintain comfort. For high
humidity conditions it may be necessary to remain in the
Recirculation mode to maintain comfort.
Window Fogging
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases
turning on the Air-conditioning (pressing the SNOW-
FLAKE button) will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature
control, air direction and blower speed to maintain
comfort.
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to
direct air onto the windshield by using MIX Mode
position on the control. Adjust the temperature control
and blower speed to maintain comfort. High blower
speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on the
windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
defrost mode.
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Contaminates on the inside of windows can increase the
rate of window fogging.
Summer Operation
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high
quality antifreeze coolant during summer, to provide
proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point
of the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50%
concentration of engine coolant to distilled water is
recommended. Refer to “Cooling System” under “Main-
tenance Procedures” in Section 7.
When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy
traffic, in hot weather, especially when towing a trailer,
additional engine cooling may be required. If this situa-
tion is encountered, operate the transmission in a lower
gear and set the air conditioner to recirculation mode.
Operating the air conditioner in recirculation mode pro-
vides the maximum performance from your air condi-
tioning. When stopped in heavy traffic, it may be neces-
sary to shift into NEUTRAL and depress the accelerator
slightly for fast idle operation.
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstruc-
tions. This will help prevent snow going into the ducts.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
4
Operation Tips Chart
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
m Starting Procedures .................... 239
▫ Manual Transmission .................. 239
▫ Automatic Transmission ................ 239
▫ Normal Starting ..................... 240
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or
–29°C) ............................ 240
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ................. 240
▫ After Starting ....................... 241
m Engine Block Heater — If Equipped ......... 241
m Manual Transmission ................... 242
▫ Shifting ........................... 243
▫ Downshifting ....................... 244
▫ Reverse Shifting ..................... 245
m Automatic Transmission ................. 245
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System ...... 246
▫ Automatic Transmission ................ 246
m Four-Wheel Drive Operation .............. 251
5
▫ NV233/243 GII Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions................ 251
▫ Shifting Procedure - NV233/243 Transfer
Case .............................. 255
▫ NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case
Operating Information / Precautions ....... 257
▫ Shifting Procedure - NV 244 Generation II
Transfer Case ....................... 261
m Limited-Slip Rear Axle Differential — If
Equipped ............................ 262
m Driving On Slippery Surfaces ............. 263
m Driving Through Water .................. 264
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ................. 264
▫ Shallow Standing Water ................ 264
m Power Steering ........................ 266
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ............. 266
m Parking Brake ........................ 267
m Brake System ......................... 269
▫ Rear-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) –
If Equipped......................... 269
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . 270
m Tire Safety Information .................. 272
▫ Tire Markings ....................... 272
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN).......... 275
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ........... 276
m Tires — General Information .............. 280
▫ Tire Pressure ........................ 280
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures ................. 281
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation .... 282
▫ Radial Ply Tires ...................... 283
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped ........ 284
▫ Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped ......... 284
▫ Tire Spinning ....................... 285
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ................. 286
▫ Life Of Tire ......................... 286
▫ Replacement Tires .................... 287
▫ Alignment And Balance ................ 288
m Supplemental Tire Pressure Information — If
Equipped ............................ 289
m Tire Chains .......................... 289
m Snow Tires .......................... 291
m Tire Rotation Recommendations ............ 291
m Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) — If
Equipped ............................ 292
▫ Base System – If Equipped .............. 295
▫ General Information................... 297
m Fuel Requirements ..................... 297
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ................. 298
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ............. 298
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ...... 299
▫ MMT In Gasoline .................... 300
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ............... 300
▫ Fuel System Cautions.................. 300
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings............. 302
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
5
m
Flexible Fuel (4.7L Engine Only) — If Equipped
. . 302
▫ E-85 General Information ............... 302
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) ................... 304
▫ Fuel Requirements .................... 304
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles ...... 305
▫ Starting ........................... 305
▫ Cruising Range ...................... 305
▫ Replacement Parts .................... 305
m Adding Fuel ......................... 306
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ............... 306
m Vehicle Loading ....................... 308
▫ Certification Label .................... 308
▫ Curb Weight ........................ 309
▫ Loading ........................... 309
m Trailer Towing ........................ 310
▫ Common Towing Definitions ............ 311
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification .............. 315
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ...................... 316
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight .............. 316
▫ Towing Requirements ................. 317
▫ Towing Tips ........................ 322
m Snowplow ........................... 323
m Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome,
Etc.)................................ 324
▫ 2WD Models ........................ 324
▫ 4WD Models ........................ 324
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
Manual Transmission
Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEU-
TRAL and depress clutch pedal to the floor before
starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a
clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless
the clutch is pressed to the floor.
Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the shift lever in NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be
depressed to shift out of PARK.
Tip Start Feature
Turn the ignition switch to START position and release it
as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself
when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this
occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal starting
procedure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
5
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a warm or cold engine
is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelera-
tor pedal.
Turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
within 10 seconds, turn the key to the OFF position, wait
5 seconds, then repeat the starting procedure.
Extreme Cold Weather (below –20°F or –29°C)
To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
•
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis-
charged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be dan-
gerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump-
Starting” in Section 6 and follow them carefully.
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
normal starting procedure, it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there
while cranking the engine. This should clear any excess
fuel, in case the engine is flooded.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accel-
erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 sec-
ond periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held
to the floor, the normal starting procedure should be
repeated.
After Starting
The idle speed is automatically controlled and will de-
crease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is located at the right front
of the engine compartment for all engine applications.
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
5
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-
ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch.
NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience in-
creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid
warms up. This is normal.
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting
Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As
you release the clutch pedal, lightly depress the accelera-
tor pedal.
You should always use 1st gear when starting from a
standing position.
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both
fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as
listed in recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the
vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily
loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended up-shift
speeds may not apply.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
En-
gine
Axle
Accel-
eration
Rate
1to2 2to3 3to4 4to5 5to6
3.7L
3.21
&
3.55
ACCEL
&
CRUISE
15
(24)
10
(16)
24
(39)
19
(31)
34
(55)
27
(44)
47
(76)
37
(60)
56
(90)
41
(66)
Shift Pattern
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
5
Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
recommended to preserve brakes when driving down
steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time
provides better acceleration when you desire to resume
speed. Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to
avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid.
CAUTION!
When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift
one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine
which can cause valve damage, and/or clutch disc
damage even if the clutch pedal is depressed.
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended down-
shifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed
and/or damage the clutch disc even if the clutch pedal
is depressed.
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gear
Selec-
tion
6to5 5to4 4to3 3to2 2to1
Maxi-
mum
Speed
85 mph
(135
km/h)
75 mph
(120
km/h)
55 mph
(88
km/h)
35 mph
(56
km/h)
20 mph
(32
km/h)
Reverse Shifting
To shift into REVERSE, bring the vehicle to a complete
stop. Depress the clutch and pause briefly to allow the
gear train to stop rotating. Beginning from the NEUTRAL
position, move the shift lever in one quick smooth
motion straight across and into the REVERSE area (the
driver will feel a firm “click” as the shifter passes the
“knock-over”). Complete the shift by pulling the shift
lever into REVERSE.
The “knock-over” prevents the driver from accidentally
entering the REVERSE shift area and warns the driver
that they are about to shift the transmission into RE-
VERSE. Due to this feature, a slow shift to REVERSE can
be perceived as a high shift effort.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
5
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your right foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This system prevents you from moving the shift lever out
of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
pressed. This system is active only while the ignition
switch is in the ON position. Always depress the brake
pedal first, before moving the shift lever out of PARK.
Automatic Transmission
The electronic PRNDLon the instrument cluster indicates
the transmission gear selected. The shift lever is mounted
on the right side of the steering column. To drive, move
the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the desired
drive position. Pull the shift lever toward you when
shifting into REVERSE, SECOND, FIRST or PARK, or
when shifting out of PARK.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL position into another gear range.
PARK
PARK supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Always apply the parking brake first, then place the shift
lever into the PARK position.
WARNING!
•
Never use PARK position on an automatic trans-
mission as a substitute for the parking brake.
Always apply the parking brake fully, when
parked, to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
•
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake
pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward
or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle
and hit someone or something. Only shift into
gear when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
REVERSE
Use the REVERSE range only after the vehicle has come
to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL
Shift to NEUTRAL when vehicle is standing for pro-
longed periods with engine running. Engine may be
started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must
leave the vehicle.
DRIVE
Use DRIVE for most city and highway driving.
2 (Second)
For driving slowly in heavy city traffic or on mountain
roads where more precise speed control is desirable, use
2nd gear. Use it also when climbing long grades, and for
engine braking when descending moderately steep
grades. To prevent excessive engine speed, do not exceed
45 mph (72 km/h) in this range.
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
5
1 (First)
For driving up very steep hills and for engine braking at
low speeds, 25 mph (40 km/h) or less, when going down
hill, use 1st gear. To prevent excessive engine speed do
not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h) in this range.
Overdrive Operation
The Overdrive automatic transmission contains an
electronically-controlled 4th and 5th (if equipped) gear
(Overdrive). The transmission will automatically shift
from Drive to Overdrive, if the following conditions are
present:
•
the transmission shift lever is in Drive;
•
the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem-
perature;
•
vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph
(48 km/h);
•
the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated;
•
transmission has reached normal operating
temperature.
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem-
peratures, the transmission may not shift into Overdrive
and will automatically select the most desirable gear for
operation at this temperature. Normal operation will
resume when the transmission fluid temperature has
risen to a suitable level. Refer to “Torque Converter
Clutch” in this section.
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the
transmission will automatically select the most desirable
gear for operation at this temperature. If the transmission
temperature becomes hot enough, the “Trans Temp” light
may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out
of Overdrive until the transmission cools down. After
cooldown, the transmission will resume normal
operation.
The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to
DRIVE if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at
vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph (56 km/h).
When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-
curs, press the TOW/HAUL switch. This will improve
performance and reduce the potential for transmission
overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When
TOW/HAUL Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
5
operating in TOW/HAUL mode, 5th gear (if equipped) is
disabled and 2-3 and 3-4 shift patterns are modified.
Shifts into Overdrive (4th gear) are allowed during
steady cruise (for improved fuel economy), and auto-
matic closed-throttle downshifts to 3rd gear (for im-
proved braking) will occur during steady braking.
The TOW/HAUL light will illuminate in the instrument
cluster to indicate when the switch has been activated.
Pressing the switch a second time restores normal opera-
tion. If the TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch must
be pressed each time the engine is started.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy is included
in all automatic transmissions. A clutch, within the
torque converter, engages automatically at a calibrated
speed at light throttle. It engages at higher speeds under
heavier acceleration. This may result in a slightly differ-
ent feeling or response during normal operation in high
gear. When the vehicle speed drops below a calibrated
speed, or during acceleration, the clutch automatically
and smoothly disengages. The feature is operational in
Overdrive and in Drive.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
(usually after 1-3 miles [1.6 - 4.8 km] of driving). Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal.
Pressing the TOW/HAUL switch, when the transmission
is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the transmis-
sion is able to shift into, and out of, Overdrive.
NOTE: If the vehicle has not been driven in several
days, the first few seconds of operation after shifting the
transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to
the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter
will refill within five seconds of shifting from PARK into
any other gear position.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
NV233/243 GII Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions
The NV233/243 is an electric-shift transfer case and is
operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case
Switch), which is located on the instrument panel.
The NV233/243 transfer case provides four mode posi-
tions: 2 (rear) wheel drive high range, 4 wheel drive high
range, 4 wheel drive low range, and NEUTRAL.
The NV233/243 transfer case is designed to be driven in
the 2-wheel drive position (2WD) for normal street and
highway conditions (dry hard-surfaced roads).
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock
the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is
accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the
desired position - Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this
section. The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are
designed for loose or slippery road surfaces only. Driving
in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry
hard-surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and
damage to the driveline components.
The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected by
depressing the recessed button located on the lower
left-hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch.
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be
used for recreational towing only. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in Section 5 for specific procedures on shifting
into and out of NEUTRAL.
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
5
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
Transfer case position indicator lights are located on the
instrument cluster. If there is no indicator light on or
flashing, the transfer case position is in two-wheel drive
(2WD). If the indicator light is on, the desired position
(4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW) has been obtained.
If One or More Shift Requirements are not Met:
1. An indicator light will flash.
2. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
the control knob back to the current position, wait five
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require-
ments, refer to the 9Shifting Procedure9 in this section.
The “SVC 4WD” warning light monitors the electric shift
4WD system. If this light remains on after engine start-up
or illuminates during driving, it means that the 4WD
system is not functioning properly and that service is
required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the (SVC 4WD( light is illumi-
nated. Not engaging the parking brake may allow the
vehicle to roll, which may cause personal injury.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. The NV233/243 trans-
fer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and there-
fore the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal
for the shift to take place. Shifting while only the front or
rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the trans-
fer case.
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or
4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care
not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of 4-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
Because 4 wheel drive provides improved traction, there
is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds.
Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
5
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, refer to the following infor-
mation:
2WD
The 2–Wheel Drive (Rear-Wheel Drive) High Range is
used for normal street and highway driving, on dry,
hard-surfaced roads.
4WD LOCK
The 4-Wheel Drive Lock (4WD LOCK) Range locks the
front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range
provides additional traction for loose or slippery road
surfaces only.
4WD LOW
The 4-Wheel Drive Low (4WD LOW) Range provides
low speed 4-wheel drive. It locks the front and rear
driveshafts together, forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional
traction and maximum pulling power for loose or slip-
pery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
N
The NEUTRAL Range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. NEUTRAL is used for
flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in Section 5.
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Procedure - NV233/243 Transfer Case
NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case
will not shift, the indicator light for the previous position
will remain ON, and the newly-selected position indica-
tor light will continue to flash until all the requirements
for the selected position have been met. To retry a shift:
return the control knob back to the original position,
make certain all shift requirements have been met, wait
five seconds, and try the shift again.
2WD-to-4WD LOCK or 4WD LOCK-to-2WD
Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with
the vehicle stopped, or in motion. With the vehicle in
motion, the transfer case will engage / disengage faster if
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turn-
ing the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the
ignition key must be in the ON position with the engine
either RUNNING or OFF. This shift cannot be completed
if the key is in the ACC position.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock Brake
Systems, the 4x4 system will not allow shifts between
2WD/ 4WD LOCK if the rear wheels are spinning (no
traction). In this situation the selected position indicator
light will flash and the original position indicator light
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
5
will remain ON. At this time, reduce speed and stop
spinning the wheels to complete the shift. There may be
a delay up to 10 seconds for the shift to complete after the
wheels have stopped spinning.
4WD LOCK-to-4WD LOW or 4WD LOW-to-4WD
LOCK
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW, some
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), or completely stopped. USE
EITHER OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES:
Preferred Procedure
1. With engine RUNNING, slow vehicle to 2 to 3 mph (3
to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (depress clutch
on manual transmissions).
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control
switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift transmission back into gear (release clutch
on manual transmissions).
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the key ON and the engine either OFF or
RUNNING, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (de-
press clutch on manual transmissions).
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
position.
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift transmission back into gear (release clutch
on manual transmissions).
NOTE: If steps 1 or 2, of either the Preferred orAlternate
Procedure, are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift,
or if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt
is in process, then the indicator light will flash and the
current transfer case position will be maintained. To retry
the selection, turn the control knob back to the current
position, wait five seconds, and retry shift.
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case Operating
Information / Precautions
The NV 244 Generation II is an electric-shift transfer case
and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch, which is
located on the instrument panel.
The NV 244 Generation II transfer case provides four
mode positions - Normal four-wheel drive (4WD) high
range, 4-wheel-drive lock (4WD LOCK), 4-wheel drive
low (4WD LOW) range, and NEUTRAL.
This transfer case is equipped with an inter-axle differ-
ential that allows driving the vehicle in the normal
all-wheel drive position (4WD) at all times on any given
road surface, including dry, hard-surfaced roads. The
4WD mode allows the front and rear wheels to rotate at
different speeds. This eliminates driveline binding and
component wear normally associated with driving the
vehicle in the 4WD LOCK position on dry, hard-surfaced
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
5
roads. This feature provides the safety, security, and
convenience of operating in all-wheel drive at all times
regardless of road conditions.
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOCK
and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock the front
and rear driveshafts together, through the transfer case
inter-axle differential, and force the front and rear wheels
to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by
rotating the 4WD Control Switch to these positions. The
4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are intended for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry, hard-surfaced
roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the
driveline components.
The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected by
depressing the recessed button located on the lower left
hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch.
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be
used for recreational towing only. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in Section 5 for specific procedures on shifting
into and out of NEUTRAL.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
Transfer case position indicator lights are located on the
instrument cluster. If there are no indicator lights on or
flashing, the transfer case position is 4-wheel drive
(4WD) and indicates the current and desired transfer case
selection (4WD ⇔ 4WD LOCK).
The “SVC 4WD” warning light monitors the electric shift
4WD system. If this light remains on after engine start up
or illuminates during driving, it means that the 4WD
system is not functioning properly and that service is
required. See your authorized dealer for service.
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the (SVC 4WD( light is illumi-
nated. Not engaging the parking brake may allow the
vehicle to roll, which may cause personal injury.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. The NV 244 Generation
II transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and
therefore the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be
equal for the shift to take place. Shifting while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the
transfer case.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD or
4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care
not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of 4-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
Because 4-wheel drive provides improved traction, there
is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds.
Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move,
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
5
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, refer to the following infor-
mation:
4WD
The 4-Wheel Drive High Range employs the inter-axle
differential. This range allows front and rear wheels to
rotate at different speeds on all road surfaces.
4WD LOCK
The 4-Wheel Drive Lock (4WD LOCK) Range locks the
transfer case inter-axle differential, forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional
traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
4WD LOW
The 4-Wheel Drive Low (4WD LOW) Range provides
low speed 4-wheel drive. It locks the front and rear
driveshafts together, forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional
traction and maximum pulling power for loose or slip-
pery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
N
The NEUTRAL Range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. NEUTRAL is used for
flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in Section 5.
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Procedure - NV 244 Generation II
Transfer Case
NOTE: The 4x4 system will not allow shifts between
4WD/4WD LOCK if the rear wheels are spinning (no
traction). In this situation, a position indicator light will
flash and the original position indicator light will remain
on. At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the
wheels to complete the shift. There may be a delay up to
13 seconds for the shift to complete after the wheels have
stopped spinning.
NOTE: Delayed shifting out of the 4WD LOCK position
may be experienced due to uneven tire wear, low tire
pressure, or excessive loading.
NOTE: When shifting into, or out of 4WD LOW, some
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. USE EITHER
OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow vehicle to 2 to 3 mph (3
to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
5
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control
switch to the desired position.
4. After the position indicator light has stopped flashing,
shift the transmission back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the key ON and the engine either OFF or
running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
position.
4. After the position indicator light has stopped flashing,
shift the transmission back into gear.
NOTE:
•
The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place
and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If
the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
•
If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The indicator light will flash and the current
transfer case position will be maintained. To retry the
selection, turn the control knob back to the current
position, wait five seconds, and retry the shift.
LIMITED-SLIP REAR AXLE DIFFERENTIAL — IF
EQUIPPED
The limited-slip differential provides additional traction
on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel. It improves traction
when there is a difference between the characteristics of
the surface under the right and left rear wheels. During
normal driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit is
similar to a conventional differential. But on a slippery
surface, the differential delivers more of the driving effort
to the wheel having the better traction.
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differen-
tial, never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground. The vehicle may drive through the rear
wheel remaining on the ground and cause you to lose
control of the vehicle.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when
both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could
cause both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to
slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a
turn.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the car in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
5
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).
Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s
surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper
water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
•
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
•
Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water, and if there are any obstacles
in the way, before driving through the standing
water.
•
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Driving through standing water may cause dam-
age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-
ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission/transaxle, axle, etc.) for signs of con-
tamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in
appearance) after driving through standing water.
Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid
appears contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
•
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
5
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any
way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. For correct fluid type, refer to ”Power Steering
Reservoir” under “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section.
PARKING BRAKE
The foot-operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
NOTE: The instrument cluster Brake Warning Light
indicates only that the parking brake is applied.You must
be sure the parking brake is fully applied before leaving
the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
5
Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and
the shift lever is in the PARK position (automatic trans-
mission), or REVERSE, or 1st gear (manual transmission).
When parking on a hill, you should apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK.
WARNING!
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic
transmission in PARK, a manual transmission in
REVERSE or 1st gear. Failure to do so may cause
the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Parking Brake
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
The parking brake should be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
off), the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be significantly more than that
required with the power system operating.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function with
some loss of braking effectiveness. This will be evident by
increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal
force required to slow or stop, and activation of the Brake
Warning light and the ABS light during brake use.
Rear-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) – If
Equipped
The Rear-Wheel ABS provides increased vehicle stability
and brake performance under most braking conditions.
The system automatically controls the operation of the
rear brakes to prevent rear wheel lockup.
The ABS remains operational in the 4-wheel drive mode.
The level of performance is reduced when the front
brakes are locked up. This will cause the rear brakes to
lock-up through the drivetrain, which may reduce the
effectiveness of the anti-lock system.
During severe braking conditions, particularly with
changing road surfaces, such as ice to concrete, a slight
drop or minor pulsation may be felt in the brake pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
5
WARNING!
Both Anti-Lock Brake Systems contain sophisticated
electronic equipment. It may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or high out-
put radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capabil-
ity. Installation of such equipment should be done by
qualified professionals.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
4-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining
vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The
system operates with a separate computer to modulate
hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up and help
avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
The ABS includes an amber ABS warning light. When the
light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The
system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning
the ignition OFF and ON again may reset the ABS if the
fault detected was only momentary.
WARNING!
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Anti-Lock Brake Systems (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
•
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
When you are in a severe braking condition involving
use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as
the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the
system reverting to the base brake system.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a
pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise.
These occurrences are normal, and indicate that the
system is functioning properly.
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
5
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter 9P9 is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•
LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan-
dards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards, and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger Car tire size based on U.S. design standards
(....blank....( = Passenger Car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— 9R9 means radial construction
—9D9 means diagonal or bias construction
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
5
EXAMPLE:
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
(....blank....( = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
5
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
B-Pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
Tire and Loading Information Placard
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
5
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
•
The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
5
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
•
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in tire failure.
•
Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
•
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
•
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on
the face of the driver’s door or on the driver’s side “B”
pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. DO NOT make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
5
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or six, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
5
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
•
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, DO NOT drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h).
•
Temporary-use spare tires have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear indica-
tors, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced.
•
Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
DO NOT install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
DO NOT install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, DO NOT
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
the compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle
may result.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited-
use spare tire warning label located on the limited-use
spare tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
The limited-use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, DO NOT drive more
than 50 mph (80 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or
limited-use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace
(or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, DO
NOT spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously
without stopping when you are stuck.
For additional information, refer to “Freeing A Stuck
Vehicle” in Section 6.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. DO NOT spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
5
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
1—WornTire
2 — New Tire
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
5
WARNING!
•
DO NOT use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
•
NEVER use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer
readings.
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
•
Fast tire wear.
•
Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
•
Vehicle pull to right or left.
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your
authorized dealer for proper diagnosis.
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE
INFORMATION — IF EQUIPPED
A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passen-
gers [150 lbs (68 kg) each] plus 200 lbs (91 kg) of cargo.
Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle
will be found on the face of the driver’s door.
TIRE CHAINS
CAUTION!
•
The use of chains is permitted only on vehicles
equipped with P245/70R16 tires.
•
Use only “Class S” chains or other traction aids
that meet SAE Type “S” specifications.
•
Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires.
•
Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle, as
recommended by the chain manufacturer.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle, tires or chains,
observe the following precautions:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
5
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Because of limited chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Bro-
ken chains can cause serious vehicle damage. Stop
the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
suggest chain breakage. Remove the damaged
parts of the chain before further use.
•
Install chains as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about 1/2 mile (0.8 km).
•
Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h).
•
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
•
Do not install tire chains on front wheels of
vehicles.
•
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for usage. Always use the lower sug-
gested operating speed of the chain manufacturer
if different than the speed recommended by the
manufacturer.
These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, includ-
ing link and cable (radial) chains.
Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires of your
vehicle.
NOTE: The use of class “S” chains is permitted on your
vehicle with P245/70R16 tires.
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
•
Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with
tires other than P245/70R16. There may not be
adequate clearance for the chains and you are
risking structural or body damage to your vehicle.
•
Do not use tire chains on the front wheels of your
vehicle. There may not be adequate clearance for
the chains and you are risking structural or body
damage to your vehicle.
SNOW TIRES
Snow tires should be of the same size and type construc-
tion as the front tires. Consult the manufacturer of the
snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed
requirement associated with the tire. These tires should
always be operated at the vehicle maximum capacity
inflation pressures under any load condition.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile
with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
5
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure (the placard is lo-
cated on the driver’s side B-pillar).
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than
three hours - and in outside ambient temperature. Refer
to the “Tires – General Information” in this section for
information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s
tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment
for this increased pressure.
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire
pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold
for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recom-
mended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the TPMS warning lamp to be turned off. The
system will automatically update and the TPMS warning
lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures
have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive
this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of
33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS
lamp. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to
rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the TPMS
lamp will still be ON. In this situation, the TPMS lamp
will turn off only after the tires have been inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
5
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor dam-
age. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance
beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as
damage to the sensors may result.
•
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the tire pressure moni-
toring sensor.
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Lamp.
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System – If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver module
•
Four tire pressure monitoring sensors
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an au-
dible chime will be activated when one or more of
the four active road tire pressures are low. Should this
occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate
each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value. The system will automatically update
and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will
extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been
received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this
information.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will turn off when the
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
5
fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur
by any of the following scenarios: 1) Jamming due to
electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the
same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors; 2) Installing
some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects
radio wave signals; 3) Lots of snow or ice around the
wheels or wheel housings; 4) Using tire chains on the
vehicle; 5) Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM
sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a non-matching
full size spare wheel and tire assembly.
1. This spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitor-
ing sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the tire
pressure in the spare tire.
2. If you install the full size spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound
and the TPM Telltale Lamp will still turn ON due to the
low tire.
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 10 min-
utes above 15 mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Lamp
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the full size spare tire,
the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale
Lamp will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below
the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States .....................KR5S120123
Canada ........................2671-S120123
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
All engines (except 4.7L HO engines) are
designed to meet all emissions regulations,
and provide excellent fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality un-
leaded “regular” gasoline having an oc-
tane rating of 87. The use of premium
gasoline is not recommended. Under normal conditions,
the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit
over high-quality regular gasolines, and in some circum-
stances may result in poorer performance.
The 4.7L HO engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations, and provide satis-
factory fuel economy and performance
when using high-quality unleaded gaso-
line having an octane range of 87 to 91. The
manufacturer recommends the use of
91 octane for optimum performance.
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
5
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide, have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC), which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC speci-
fications, if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline, referred to as “Reformulated Gaso-
line.” Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and
are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
We strongly support the use of reformulated gasolines.
Properly-blended reformulated gasolines will provide
excellent performance and durability for the engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country, during the
Winter months, to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of
Methanol.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
•
operate in a lean mode
•
OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
•
poor engine performance
•
poor cold start and cold drivability
•
increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
•
drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
•
change the engine oil and oil filter
•
disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
5
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emission system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to look
for gasolines without MMT in Canada, because MMT can
be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United
States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasolines sold in the United States are required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in unnecessary cost. There-
fore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance, damage the emission control system.
(Continued)
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
•
When pulling a heavy load or driving a fully,
loaded vehicle when the humidity is low and the
temperature is high, use a premium unleaded fuel
to help prevent spark knock. If spark knock per-
sists, lighten the load, or engine piston damage
may result.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
The use of fuel additives which are now being
sold as octane enhancers is not recommended.
Many of these products contain high concentra-
tions of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
5
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-
mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (4.7L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve-
hicles only. These vehicles can be identified by the unique
yellow fuel filler cap (gas cap) that shows E85 / Gasoline.
This section only covers those subjects that are unique to
these vehicles. Please refer to the other sections of this
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
manual for information on features that are common
between Flexible Fuel and gasoline-only powered ve-
hicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler cap (gas cap)
can operate on E-85.
E-85 Fuel Cap
E-85 Badge
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
5
ETHANOL FUEL (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov-
ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternat-
ing between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recom-
mended.
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
•
you do not add less than 5 gal (19 L) when refueling
•
you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km)
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in drivability
during warm up.
NOTE: Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM
D5798). With non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may
experience hard starting and rough idle following start
up even if the above recommendations are followed,
especially when the ambient temperature is below 32°F
(0°C).
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) and Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formu-
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPARt engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during ex-
tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler LLC engines. Use MOPARt or an equivalent oil
meeting the specification MS-6395.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in drivability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/Liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol, com-
patible parts.
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
5
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door. When
fueling, the cap may be placed on the inside of the filler
door.
If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
cap is for use with this vehicle.
Gas Cap Holder
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel tank
filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let
impurities into the fuel system.
WARNING!
•
Never allow any lit smoking materials near the
vehicle while removing the cap or filling the tank.
•
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
NOTE: If fuel is poured from a portable container, the
container should have a flexible nozzle long enough to
extend into the fuel filler tube.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each
time the vehicle is refueled.
WARNING!
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle or on a
truck bed. You could be burned. Always place gas
containers on the ground while filling.
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
5
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration Regulations, your vehicle has a certification
label affixed to the driver’s side door.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and shows the month, day, and
hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems. Total load must be limited so that
GVWR is not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a vehicle can carry including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options, and cargo.
Certification Label
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the component in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires, or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes
specified by purchasers for increased durability do not
necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
This is the minimum allowable tire size for your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of
this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure (Cold)
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been ex-
ceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
5
should then be determined separately to be sure that the
load is properly distributed over front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either
the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total
load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be
shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met.
Store heavier items down low and be sure that the weight
is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before
driving.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re-
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its 9loaded and
ready for operation9 condition. The recommended way to
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination. (Note that
GCWR ratings include a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the
presence of a driver.)
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
5
Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball
by the trailer is the tongue weight. In most cases it should
not be less than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load.
You must consider this as part of the load on your
vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum
width of the front of a trailer.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it pro-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier tongue
weights and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
may reduce handling, stability, and braking perfor-
mance, and could result in an accident.
Weight-Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable recreational
vehicle dealer for additional information.
EXAMPLE — Without Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
5
EXAMPLE — With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct) EXAMPLE — Improper Adjustment of Weight-
Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to
2,000 lbs (907 kg) without added equipment or alter-
ations to the standard equipment. Your vehicle may be
factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing
over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional Trailer Tow Prep
Package. See your authorized dealer for package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” for the website address that contains
the necessary information for your specific drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification
Class Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
Duty
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
Fifth Wheel/
Gooseneck
Greater than 10,000 lbs
(4540 kg)
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
5
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maxi-
mum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
•
http:// www.dodge.com/towing
•
http:// www.dodge.ca (Canada)
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to “Tire and Loading Information Placard”
under “Tire Safety Information” in Section 5.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle driv-
etrain components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
CAUTION!
•
Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles
(805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may dam-
age your vehicle.
•
During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance
Schedule. Refer to Section 8 of this manual. When towing
a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
5
WARNING! (Continued)
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chas-
sis structure or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
PARK. With a manual transmission, shift the transmis-
sion into REVERSE. For four-wheel drive vehicles,
make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL.
Always, block or 9chock9 the trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer so that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight.)
Towing Requirements — Tires
−
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
−
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. For proper
tire inflation procedures, refer to “Tire Pressures”
under ”Tires–General Information” in Section 5.
−
Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
−
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. For the proper inspection
procedure, refer to “Tread Wear Indicators” under
”Tires–General Information” in Section 5.
−
When replacing tires, refer to “Replacement Tires”
under “Tires–General Information” in Section 5. Re-
placing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will
not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
−
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
−
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
−
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
5
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights and Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness
and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations:
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
4-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
7-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
5
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in 1st gear to avoid excessive clutch
slippage.
Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission
The “D” range can be selected when towing. However, if
frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the TOW/
HAUL feature should be selected.
NOTE: Using the TOW/HAUL feature while operating
the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will im-
prove performance and extend transmission life by re-
ducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action
will also provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to the “Main-
tenance Schedule” in Section 8 for proper maintenance
intervals.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing.
Towing Tips — Tow/Haul (If Equipped)
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat-
ing, turn the TOW/HAUL feature ON when driving in
hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on
more severe grades.
Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If
Equipped)
−
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
−
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can resume cruising speed.
−
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Towing Tips — Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
−
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission
in NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
−
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
−
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
SNOWPLOW
Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment
should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the
front end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpect-
edly or could fail to deploy during a collision.
WARNING!
Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other
aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle.
This could adversely affect the functioning of the
airbag system and you could be injured.
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
5
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
2WD Models
Recreational towing of 2WD models is not allowable.
Towing the vehicle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage. Removal of the
driveshaft for towing is not recommended, since this
would allow fluid to drain from the transmission.
4WD Models
CAUTION!
•
Internal damage to the transfer case will occur if a
front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational
towing.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL
for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL selection
button is located on the lower left hand corner of
the 4WD Control Switch. Shifts into and out of
transfer case NEUTRAL can take place with the
selector switch in any mode position.
•
Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK
position for recreational towing.
•
Manual transmissions must be placed in gear (for
example, 4th gear) for recreational towing. Failure
to follow these procedures can cause severe trans-
mission and/or transfer case damage.
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational Towing Procedure
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL before recre-
ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shut engine OFF.
3. Turn the ignition key to the ON position but do not
start the engine.
4. Depress brake pedal.
5. Shift automatic transmission into NEUTRAL, or de-
press clutch on manual transmission.
6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
depress the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL button for
4 seconds.
7. After shift is completed and the NEUTRAL light
comes on, release the NEUTRAL button.
8. Start engine.
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
5
9. Shift automatic transmission into REVERSE.
10. Release brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that
there is no vehicle movement.
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 with the transmission in
DRIVE.
12. Shut engine OFF and place ignition key to the
unlocked OFF position.
13. Shift automatic transmission into PARK. Shift
manual transmissions into 4th gear.
14. Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar.
15. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
NOTE:
•
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
prior to depressing the NEUTRAL selection button,
and must continue to be met until the 4 seconds elapse
and the shift has been completed. If any of these
requirements (with the exception of 3 - Key ON) are
not met prior to depressing the NEUTRAL button or
are no longer met during the 4 second timer, then the
NEUTRAL indicator light will flash continuously until
all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL button
is released.
•
The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place
and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If
the key in not ON, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
•
Flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates
that shift requirements have not been met.
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans-
mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL and the engine running. With the transfer
case in NEUTRAL, ensure that the engine is off prior
to shifting the transmission into PARK.
Returning to Normal Operation
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Reconnect the negative battery cable.
2. The vehicle must be at a complete stop.
3. Place the ignition key in the OFF position (if it has
been moved or the engine has been started).
4. Place ignition key in the ON position (engine off).
5. Depress brake pedal.
6. Shift automatic transmission into NEUTRAL, or de-
press clutch on manual transmission.
7. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
depress the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL button for
1 second.
8. After the NEUTRAL indicator light turns off, release
the NEUTRAL button.
9. After the NEUTRAL button has been released, the
transfer case will shift to the position identified by the
selector switch.
10. Start the engine. Shift the automatic transmission into
DRIVE, or place the manual transmission in 1st gear and
momentarily release the clutch, to verify that the transfer
case has engaged.
11. Set parking brake. Shift automatic transmission into
PARK or shift manual transmission into NEUTRAL.
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
5
NOTE:
•
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
prior to depressing the NEUTRAL selection button,
and must continue to be met until 1 second elapses
and the shift has been completed. If any of these
requirements (with the exception of 3 - key ON) are
not met prior to depressing the NEUTRAL button or
are no longer met during the 1 second time, then all of
the mode position indicator lights will flash continu-
ously until all requirements are met or until the
NEUTRAL button is released.
•
The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place
and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If
the key is not ON, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
•
Flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates
that shift requirements have not been met.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
despite the transmission position. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in
the vehicle.
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
•
Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
•
Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage
internal parts.
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
m Hazard Warning Flasher ................. 332
m Changing A Flat Tire ................... 332
▫ Jack Location ....................... 332
▫ Removing The Spare Tire ............... 334
▫ Tire Changing Procedure ............... 337
▫ Preparations ........................ 337
▫ Instructions ......................... 338
▫ To Stow The Flat Or Spare .............. 343
m Jump–Starting ........................ 343
m Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................. 346
m Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ....... 346
m Towing A Disabled Vehicle ............... 347
▫ Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles .............. 347
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles .............. 348
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The Hazard Warning Flasher switch is located on the top
of the steering column, just behind the steering wheel.
Press the switch and all front and rear directional signals
will flash intermittently. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the emergency flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
Hazard Warning Flasher will continue to operate with
the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flasher
may wear down your battery.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
Jack Location
In this vehicle, the scissor jack and tire changing tools for
Extended Cab models are stowed in a compartment
under the rear passenger seat. Crewt Cab model scissor
jack and tire changing tools are accessed by lifting up the
rear passenger seat.
Hazard Warning Flasher Switch
332 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
The jack is secured in place by turning the jack screw
until the jack is secured into place.
A finger-operated helper tool is provided to assist re-
moval and stowage of the jack. This tool must be
removed to operate the jack for changing the spare tire.
Jack Stowage Location (Extended Cab)
Jack Screw
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 333
6
WARNING!
The jack is designed as a tool for changing tires only.
The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for
service purposes, unless suitable supports are placed
under the vehicle as a safety measure. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid
icy or slippery areas.
Removing The Spare Tire
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack the truck.
Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube. Insert
the tube through the access hole in the rear bumper and
into the winch mechanism tube. Rotate the wheel wrench
handle counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the
ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it
out from under the vehicle. When the spare is clear, tilt
the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the
center of the wheel.
Jack Stowage Location (Crewt Cab)
334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Steps for Removing the Spare Tire
•
Remove the jack from the stowage compartment using
the supplied finger-assist tool.
•
Remove the finger-assist tool from jack and set aside
until jack is stowed.
•
Assemble the jack tools.
•
Locate the tire carrier access hole on the rear bumper.
•
Place assembled jack tool extension rod into the access
hole in the direction of the arrow on the bumper trim.
•
Rotate the tool counterclockwise to release and lower
the spare tire to the ground so that it can be pulled
from under the vehicle.
•
Rotate clockwise to stow the spare tire.
Inserting Lug Wrench and Extension
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 335
6
It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to
avoid tangling the loose cable.
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
Turning Lug Wrench and Extension Spare Tire Stowage Location
336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tire Changing Procedure
WARNING!
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
Do not raise this vehicle using a bumper jack. The scissor
jack is designed as a tool for changing tires on this vehicle
only. It is not recommended that the jack be used for
service purposes or to lift more than one wheel at a time.
Preparations
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface. Avoid icy or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the shift lever in PARK (automatic transmission).
On 4-Wheel Drive vehicles, shift the transfer case to the
4L position.
4. Turn the ignition OFF.
5. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 337
6
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if the right front
wheel is being changed, block the left
rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)
338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
•
Turn on the Hazard warning flasher.
1. Lower and remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools
from stowage.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove,
the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. When changing a front wheel, place the jack under the
frame rail behind the wheel. Locate the jack as far
forward as possible on the straight part of the frame prior
to inboard transition, as shown. Operate the jack using
the jack drive tube and the wheel wrench - the tube
extension, may be used but is not required.
Jack Warning Label
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339
6
4. When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive
tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the
extension tube. Place the jack under the axle in the
positions shown with the drive tubes extending to the
rear. Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
Positioning of the Jack Front Wheels Left Rear Jacking Location
340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Before raising the wheel off the ground, make
sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck
parts and adjust the jack position as required.
5. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the
vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle unstable and cause an accident. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
6. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. Install
the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To
avoid risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully
tighten the nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.
7. Using the wheel wrench, finish tightening the nuts in
a crisscross pattern. Correct nut tightness is 120 to 160 ft
lbs (163 to 217 N·m). If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
your authorized dealer or at a service station.
Right Rear Jacking Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341
6
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle. Al-
ways stow the jack, tools and the extra tire and wheel
in the places provided.
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow the
replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described.
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking.
•
Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated.
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
To Stow the Flat or Spare
Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down. Slide the
wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and
position it properly across the wheel opening.
For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation, stow
with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle.
Rotate the winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn
into place against the underside of the vehicle. Continue
to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click
three times. It cannot be overtightened. Push against the
tire several times to be sure it is firmly in place.
NOTE: To Stow the Flat or Spare: Wheel retainer does
not fit through the center of the aluminum wheel. The tire
must be stored in a safe manner in the bed of the truck.
JUMP–STARTING
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or cloth-
ing. Don’t lean over battery when attaching
clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If
acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the contami-
nated area immediately with large quantities of
water.
•
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam-
mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
from the vent holes. Do not use a booster battery
or any other booster source with an output that
exceeds 12-Volts.
Check the Battery Test Indicator (if equipped). If a light or
bright colored dot is visible in the indicator, DO NOT
jump-start the battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 343
6
If the indicator is dark or shows a green dot, proceed as
follows:
1. Wear eye protection and remove all metal jewelry such
as watch bands or bracelets, which might make an
unintended electrical contact.
2. Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but with-
out letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake, place
the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the ignition
OFF on both vehicles.
3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged
battery.
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine of the
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have
a good contact to a metal surface of the engine block.
WARNING!
•
Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the
discharge battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode.
(Continued)
344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
•
During cold weather when temperatures are be-
low freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged
battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump-starting
because the battery could rupture or explode. The
battery temperature must be brought up above
freezing point before attempting jump-start.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
WARNING!
Any procedure other than above could result in:
•
Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out
the battery vent;
•
Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion;
•
Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 345
6
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can
often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the shift lever
rhythmically between FIRST and REVERSE, while apply-
ing slight pressure to the accelerator.
The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to main-
tain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or
racing the engine is most effective. Allow the engine to
idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will
minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmis-
sion failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow
hooks.
Tow Hooks
346 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
•
Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury
or death.
•
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps and chains may break, causing
serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use of safety chains is recom-
mended. Attach towing device to main structural mem-
bers of the vehicle — not to bumpers or associated
brackets. State and local laws, applying to vehicles
under tow, must be observed.
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised
and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 347
6
Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Provided that the transmission is operable, tow with the
transmission in NEUTRAL and the ignition key in the
OFF position, along with the front wheels raised and the
rear wheels on the ground. The speed must not exceed
30 mph (50 km/h), and the distance must not exceed
15 miles (25 km).
If the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (25 km)
or faster than 30 mph (50 km/h), it must be towed on a
flatbed, or with the rear wheels raised and the front
wheels on the ground, or with the front end raised and
the rear wheels on a towing dolly.
NOTE: Towing the vehicle with the rear wheels on the
ground at more than 30 mph (50 km/h) or for more than
15 miles (25 km), can cause severe transmission damage.
348 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
m Engine Compartment — 3.7L ............. 351
m Engine Compartment — 4.7L ............. 352
m Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II ....... 353
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 353
m Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs ............................ 354
m Replacement Parts ..................... 355
m Dealer Service ........................ 356
m Maintenance Procedures ................. 356
▫ Engine Oil ......................... 356
▫ Engine Oil Filter ..................... 358
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............... 359
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ............... 359
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ............ 360
▫ Drive Shaft Constant Velocity Joints ....... 361
▫ Body Lubrication ..................... 362
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ............... 362
▫ Windshield Washers................... 363
7
▫ Exhaust System ...................... 363
▫ Cooling System ...................... 366
▫ Brake System ....................... 371
▫ Clutch Hydraulic System ............... 372
▫ Manual Transmission .................. 372
▫ Automatic Transmission ................ 372
▫ Transfer Case ....................... 375
▫ Axles ............................. 375
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion .......................... 376
m Fuses .............................. 381
▫ Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution
Center) ............................ 381
m Vehicle Storage ....................... 386
m Replacement Light Bulbs ................. 387
m Bulb Replacement ..................... 387
▫ Headlight (Halogen)/Front Park And Turn
Lights ............................. 387
▫ Rear Side Marker, Taillamps/Stop Lamps,
And Turn Signal Bulbs — Replacement ..... 389
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Light And Cargo
Lamp ............................. 391
▫ License Lamps ...................... 394
▫ Fog Lights ......................... 395
m Fluids And Capacities ................... 396
m Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ....... 397
▫ Engine ............................ 397
▫ Chassis ............................ 398
350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.7L
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Battery
2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Clutch Fluid Reservoir (Manual Transmission Only) 11 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
6 — Power Distribution Center 12 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351
7
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 4.7L
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Engine Oil Fill
2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
5 — Power Distribution Center 11 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
6 — Battery
352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•
If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose, improp-
erly installed, or damaged. A loose fuel filler cap message
will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the
gas cap until a 9clicking9 sound is heard. This is an
indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press
the odometer RESET button to turn the message off. If the
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353
7
problem persists, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap.
If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL
off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system
is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery, or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready , and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL is illuminated during
normal vehicle operation, you should have your vehicle
serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station
can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the
engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPARt parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPARt parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355
7
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempting
any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The
best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed-up engine is shut off, or
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding one quart/liter of oil when the reading
is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading
at the top of the safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
Change Engine Oil
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for
proper maintenance intervals.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357
7
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils, provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added to Engine Oils
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPARt engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for
proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPARt engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the maintenance-free battery is permanently
sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic
maintenance required.
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359
7
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post, and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked (+)
positive and (-) negative and are identified on the
battery case.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected,
should be done by an experienced repairman.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oils and Refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA), and is an ozone-saving prod-
uct. However, the manufacturer recommends that air
conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers
or other service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.
Drive Shaft Constant Velocity Joints
All 4-wheel drive models are equipped with four con-
stant velocity joints. Periodic lubrication of these joints is
not required. However, the joint boot should be inspected
for external leakage or damage periodically. If external
leakage or damage is evident, the joint boot and grease
should be replaced immediately. Continued operation
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361
7
could result in failure of the joint due to water, and dirt
contamination of the grease. This would require com-
plete replacement of the joint assembly. Refer to the
Service Manual for the detailed replacement procedure.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as
MOPARt Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy opera-
tion and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
nents to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPARt
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield
should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accu-
mulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Washers
The fluid reservoir should be checked for fluid level at
regular intervals. When freezing weather is anticipated,
flush out the water in the reservoir by operating the
system. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer anti-
freeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate the system
for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363
7
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, fol-
low the preceding safety tips.
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be ob-
tained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365
7
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or
steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to
open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator
is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser and
radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty,
clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the condenser and radiator.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for
proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine cool-
ant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” in this section for correct fluid type.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) may
result in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. If a non-HOAT coolant is intro-
duced into the cooling system in an emergency, it
should be replaced with the specified engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use
additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of Propylene Glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to 5 Years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before replace-
ment. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367
7
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
•
The manufacturer recommends using MOPARt
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology)
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34° F
(-37° C) are anticipated.
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent engine coolant (antifreeze)
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that the engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance, requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a
child, contact a physician immediately. Clean up any
ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant recovery bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) level is adequate. With the engine cold, the level
of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the coolant recovery
bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the
bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing en-
gine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369
7
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant recovery bottle need only be
checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant recovery bottle. Do not overfill.
Points to Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
•
Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
•
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled/deionized water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine, which contains aluminum
components.
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, also keep the front of
the condenser clean.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
emissions.
Brake System
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid
to bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir
of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of
the master cylinder area before removing the cap. With
disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when
pads are replaced. If the brake fluid level is abnormally
low, check system for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for the correct fluid type.
WARNING!
•
Use of brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point, or is unidentified as to specifica-
tions, may result in sudden brake failure during
hard prolonged braking. You could have an acci-
dent.
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371
7
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
CAUTION!
Do not allow a petroleum-base fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Seal damage may result.
Clutch Hydraulic System
The clutch hydraulic system is a sealed maintenance-free
system. In the event of leakage or other malfunction, the
system must be replaced.
Manual Transmission
Fluid Level Check
This fluid should be checked whenever other underhood
services are performed. The fluid level is checked by
removing the fill plug. If the level of the lubricant is more
than 1/4 in (6.35 mm) below the bottom of the filler hole
while the vehicle is level, enough lubricant should be
added to bring the level to the bottom of the filler hole.
This fluid does not require periodic changing. However,
if it becomes necessary to add or replace the fluid in these
transmissions, refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
Automatic Transmission
NOTE: If equipped with a dipstick, use the following
procedure. If your vehicle has a capped dipstick, it is
sealed and should not be tampered with. Your authorized
dealer has the proper tools to ensure that the fluid level
is set properly.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal
operating temperature 180° F (82° C). This occurs after at
least 15 miles (24 km) of driving. At normal operating
temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be-
tween the fingertips.
372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly,
the following procedure must be used:
1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating
temperature.
2. The vehicle must be on level ground.
3. Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake
pedal.
4. Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear
position, ending with the lever in PARK.
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
seated.
6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat-
ing temperature. Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on
both sides of the dipstick. If the fluid is low, add as
required into the dipstick tube. Do not overfill. After
adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube, wait
a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into
the transmission before rechecking the fluid level.
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick
with the fluid at approximately 70° F (21° C) (room
temperature). If the fluid level is correctly established at
room temperature, it should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches
180° F (82° C). Remember it is best to check the level at
the normal operating temperature.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373
7
CAUTION!
Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50° F
(10° C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to
produce an accurate reading.
7. Check for leaks. Release parking brake.
To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission
after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the
dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the
dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully-seated
position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the
dipstick tube.
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-
mance. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended trans-
mission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type. It is
important that the transmission fluid be maintained at
the prescribed level using the recommended fluid.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid, other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid, will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this sec-
tion for the correct fluid type.
Transfer Case
Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks. If a fluid leak is
evident the transfer case fluid level may be low. Have the
transfer case serviced immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage may result from operation of the vehicle
with low transfer case fluid.
Drain and Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for the correct fluid type.
Axles
Drain and Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differential
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375
7
components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be
encountered in some off-highway types of service, will
require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for the correct fluid type.
Rear Axle
Rear axle limited-slip differentials require the use of
MOPARt limited-slip additive. Refer to “Fluids, Lubri-
cants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for the correct
fluid type. This should be added to the gear lubricant
whenever a fluid change is made, when equipped with
limited-slip differential. Rear axle fluid level should be
1/4 in (6.4 mm) below filler plug for 8-1/4 in, and
9-1/4 in axles.
Front Axle
Front axle fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill
plug.
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Protection of Body And Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse affect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
•
Stone and gravel impact.
•
Insects, tree sap and tar.
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPARt Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
•
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPARt Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
•
Use MOPARt Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains, and to protect your paint finish. Take care never
to scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377
7
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads, or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels be kept clear and open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause, which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use MOPARt Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up-paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with
a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil, use MOPARt Wheel Cleaner or select a
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only
MOPARt cleaners are recommended. Do not use oven
cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’
protective finish.
378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
YES Essentialst Fabric Cleaning Procedure – if
equipped
YES Essentialst seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•
For tough stains, apply MOPARt Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•
For grease stains, apply MOPARt Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•
Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen-
tialst products.
Interior Care
Use MOPARt Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPARt Total Clean, then
MOPARt Spot & Stain Remover, if absolutely necessary.
Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall. Use MOPARt
Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Use MOPARt Vinyl Cleaner to clean vinyl upholstery
and trim.
Leather Seat Care and Cleaning
MOPARt Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379
7
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPARt Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with any commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric
defrosters, or windshields equipped with a windshield
wiper de-icer. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instru-
ments, which may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag.Amild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn, or if the
buckles do not work properly.
FUSES
CAUTION!
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it suggests a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center)
Your vehicle is equipped with an electrical power distri-
bution center located on the left side of the engine
compartment.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381
7
This center contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses and
relays. A description of each fuse and component may be
stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity num-
ber of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that
corresponds to the following chart. These fuses and
relays can be obtained from your authorized dealer.
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
1 Spare
2 Spare
3 30 Amp
Pink
Electric Brake
4 50 Amp
Red
Power Seat
5 Spare
6 20 Amp
Yellow
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) Cabin Com-
partment Node
(CCN), Radio
7 10 Amp
Red
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)/Fuel/
RAD/AC Coils
Power Distribution Center
382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
8 10 Amp
Red
Cabin Compartment
Node (CCN)/Mirror/
4x4
9 Spare
10 2 Amp
Gray
Low Current Ignition
Switch
11 10 Amp
Red
AC Clutch
12 15 Amp
Blue
Trailer Tow Lt Stop/
Turn
13 15 Amp
Blue
Trailer Tow Rt Stop/
Turn
14 20 Amp
Yellow
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) #2
15 25 Amp
Natural
Trans/Powertrain
Control Module
(PCM)
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
16 20 Amp
Yellow
Horn
17 20 Amp
Yellow
ABS Feed (Valves)
18 20 Amp
Yellow
Fuel Pump
19 15 Amp
Blue
Center High-Mounted
Stop Light (CHMSL)
20 20 Amp
Yellow
Cabin Compartment
Node (CCN) Door
Locks/Brake Trans-
mission Shift Inter-
lock (BTSI)
21 25 Amp
Natural
Audio Amp
22 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet (Switch-
able)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383
7
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
23 20 Amp
Yellow
Fog Lamps
24 20 Amp
Yellow
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) B+
25 15 Amp
Blue
Cabin Compartment
Node (CCN) Illumi-
nation
26 20 Amp
Yellow
Ignition Run/Start
Feed
27 10 Amp
Red
Power Mirror
28 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet
29 20 Amp
Yellow
Front Control Module
(FCM) 4 (Wipers)
30 Spare
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
31 30 Amp
Green
Ignition Accessory
Feed
32 30 Amp
Pink
Front Control Module
(FCM) 1 (Ext. Lights #
1)
33 30 Amp
Pink
Auto Shut Down
(ASD)
34 30 Amp
Pink
Front Control Module
(FCM) 2 (Ext. Light #
2)
35 40 Amp
Green
HVAC Blower Motor
36 Spare
37 Spare
38 20 Amp
Blue
Spare
384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
39 30 Amp
Pink
Starter Solenoid
40 40 Amp
Green
Ignition Run Feeds
41 30 Amp
Pink
Wiper Motor
42 25 Amp
Natural
Front Control Module
(FCM) 5 (T-Case)
43 10 Amp
Red
Lt Park Lamps
44 10 Amp
Red
Rt Park Lamps
45 20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer Tow Park
Lamps
46 10 Amp
Red
Airbag System # 2
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
47 Spare
48 20 Amp
Blue
Sunroof/Sound Box
49 30 Amp
Pink
Trailer Tow B+
50 40 Amp
Green
Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem (ABS) Module
(Pump)
51 40 Amp
Green
Park Lamps
52 Spare
53 40 Amp
Green
Rear Defogger
54 Spare
55 Spare
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385
7
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
56 10 Amp
Red
Heated Seats
57 20 Amp
Yellow
Airbag System # 2
58 20 Amp
Yellow
Heated Seats
59 10 Amp
Red
HVAC Module
60 10 Amp
Red
ABS Module
61 20 Amp
Yellow
Front Control Module
(FCM) 3 (Reverse
Lamps)
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
recommend that you take the following steps to mini-
mize the drain on your vehicle’s battery:
•
Disconnect the Ignition Off Draw (I.O.D.) fuses located
in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). The I.O.D.
cavity includes a snap-in retainer that allows the fuse
to be disconnected without removing it from the fuse
block.
•
The transfer case should be placed in the 4HI mode
and kept in this position to minimize the battery drain.
•
As an alternative to the above steps you may discon-
nect the negative cable from the battery.
386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb No.
Dome Light ........................WL212–2
Cargo Light ............................921
Overhead Console Lights ...................192
Reading Light.......................WL212–2
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior Bulb No.
Headlight .............................H13
Front Park/Turn/Side Marker ............3157NA
Back-Up ..............................3157
Center High Mounted Stop Light .............921
Fog Light .............................9145
License Plate Light .......................168
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal.................3057
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlight (Halogen)/Front Park And Turn Lights
1. Open the hood
2. Remove the three bolts from the front of the headlight
housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387
7
3. Grasp the headlight and pull firmly to disengage the
headlight housing from the fender panel.
4. While firmly holding the headlight housing in your
hands, unlock and disconnect headlight bulb connector.
5. Twist 1/4-turn and remove headlight bulb from hous-
ing and replace.
NOTE: The headlight bulb is a halogen bulb. Take care
not to touch the bulb with your fingers. Body oils from
your fingers could cause excessive heat buildup which
reduces bulb life.
To remove the park/turn signal bulb, rotate bulb socket
1/4-turn and remove socket from housing. Pull bulb
straight from socket.
388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Side Marker, Taillamps/Stop Lamps, And
Turn Signal Bulbs — Replacement
1. Remove the two screws that pass through the bed
sheet metal.
2. Pull the taillamp housing straight out from the body.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389
7
3. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the housing.
4. Pull bulb straight out of socket.
390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Reverse this procedure to install bulb and housing.
Place the two raised blocks past the body.
Center High-Mounted Stop Light And Cargo
Lamp
1. Remove the two screws holding the housing/lens to
the body, as shown.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391
7
2. Remove housing from the cab. 3. Remove connector from housing tab for more
clearance.
392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Turn desired bulb socket 1/4-turn and remove socket
and bulb from housing.
5. Pull desired bulb straight from the socket.
•
Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
•
Inside Bulb: Center High Mounted Stop Light
6. Reverse this procedure for installation of bulbs and
housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393
7
License Lamps
1. Using a screwdriver, pry black rubber housing from
the bumper.
2. Rotate the socket 1/4-turn counterclockwise.
394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull bulb from socket.
4. Reverse this procedure for installation.
Fog Lights
1. Disconnect connector from fog light by raising the
wire harness lock tab and pulling on wire harness
connector.
2. Rotate fog light bulb 1/4-turn counterclockwise and
pull to remove from fog light housing.
3. Reverse procedure to install.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395
7
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 22 Gallons 83 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
4.7L/4.7L HO Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.7 Liters
Cooling System (Includes 2.1 Quarts/2 Liters for Cool-
ant Bottle)
3.7L Engine (MOPARt Antifreeze/Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula)
13.3 Quarts 12.5 Liters
4.7L/4.7L HO Engine (MOPARt Antifreeze/Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula)
13.3 Quarts 12.5 Liters
396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant MOPARt Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hy-
brid Organic Additive Technology)
Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade
Engine Oil Filter MOPARt Engine Oil Filter, P/N 5281090 or equivalent
Spark Plugs (3.7L Engine) ZFR6F-11G (Gap 0.043 in [1.09 mm])
Spark Plugs (4.7L Engine) Upper Bank — FR8TE2 (Gap 0.039 in [0.99 mm]) Lower Bank —
FR8T1332 (Gap 0.051 in [1.30 mm])
Fuel Selection 3.7L/4.7L 87 Octane
Fuel Selection 4.7L HO Premium Unleaded 91 Octane only or higher
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397
7
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission MOPARt ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
Transfer Case MOPARt ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission (Getrag 238) MOPARt ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
Clutch Linkage Multi-Purpose Grease, NLGI Grade 2 E.P. or equivalent
Front Axle SAE 75W-90 Multi-Purpose Type, GL-5 Gear Lubricant (MS-9763)
Rear Axle SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant (MS-8985). Limited-slip rear axles
require MOPARt limited-slip additive (MS-10111). Whenever a fluid
change is made, 4 oz (118 ml) should be added to the gear lubricant
Brake Master Cylinder MOPARt DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3 brake fluid is
not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake
fluids
Power Steering Reservoir MOPARt ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type,
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the Emissions Con-
trol System. These, and all other maintenance services
included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving.
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emis-
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
The “Change Oil” message will flash in the instrument
cluster odometer and a single chime will sound, indicat-
ing that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE:
•
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change,
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
400 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
•
Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
•
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or 6 months, whichever
comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If this
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Oil Change
Required” in “Use Factory Settings” of the EVIC section
in this manual, or under “Odometer/Trip Odometer” in
the “Instrument Cluster Descriptions section of this
manual.
At Each Stop for Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once a Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
•
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and transmission, and
add as needed.
•
Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 401
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
•
Check the manual transmission fluid level.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
NOTE: ** Vehicles built with the 4.7L engine are
equipped with sixteen spark plugs, one set is located on
the top of the engine under the coils, and the second set
is located on the side of the engine.
The spark plugs located under the coils are a standard
plug, and must be changed every 30,000 miles
(50 000 km).
The spark plugs located on the side of the engine are a
premium plug, and must be changed every 102,000 miles
(170 000 km).
402 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 403
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if you are using your vehicle for
police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
404 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L engines).
❏ Replace the top row of spark plugs
(4.7L engines). **
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or
36 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter,
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if you are using your vehicle for
police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 405
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if you are using your vehicle for
police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
406 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the ignition cables (3.7L engine).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L engines).
❏ Replace the top row of spark plugs (4.7L engines). **
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police,
delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot
weather, above 90°F (32°C).
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid & filter if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 407
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if you are using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
408 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or
84 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter,
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if
necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 409
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or 90 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L engines).
❏ Replace the top row of spark plugs (4.7L engines). **
❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve, if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if you are using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
410 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the ignition cables (4.7L
engines).
❏ Replace the side row of spark plugs
(4.7L engines). **
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 411
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or
108 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter,
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if you are using your vehicle for
police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
412 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the ignition cables (3.7L engine).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L engines).
❏ Replace the top row of spark plugs (4.7L engines). **
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police,
delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot
weather, above 90°F (32°C).
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid & filter.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 413
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
126 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if you are using your vehicle for
police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or
132 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter,
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if
necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
138 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
414 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if you are using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
150 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L engines).
❏ Replace the top row of spark plugs
(4.7L engines). **
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 415
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
416 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
m Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle.............................. 419
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ............ 419
▫ Prepare A List ....................... 419
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ............ 419
m Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) .... 419
m MOPARt Parts ....................... 420
m Reporting Safety Defects ................. 420
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. .............................. 420
▫ In Canada .......................... 420
m Publication Order Forms ................. 421
m Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades ........................ 422
▫ Treadwear.......................... 422
▫ Traction Grades ...................... 422
▫ Temperature Grades................... 423
m If You Need Assistance .................. 423
▫ Chrysler LLC Customer Center ........... 424
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 419
9
MOPART PARTS
Mopart fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They will help keep
the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect,
you should contact the Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety defect to the Canadian government should write
to: Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investiga-
tions and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario
K1B 3V9.
420 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
•
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler LLC
vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the ve-
hicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles.
Included are starting, operating, emergency and main-
tenance procedures as well as specifications, capabili-
ties and safety tips.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 421
9
Call toll free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
422 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know you and the vehicle best,
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 423
9
and are most concerned that you get prompt and high
quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers
have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special
tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is
fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer-
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
•
If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Authorized dealership name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001
424 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-4568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hot-
line at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 425
9
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
426 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
Adding Fuel ...........................306
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 359
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...............360
Air Conditioning ........................229
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ..........229,232
Air Conditioning Refrigerant .............360,361
Air Conditioning System ................229,360
Air Filter ..............................359
Air Pressure, Tires ....................281,289
Airbag .............................46,178
Airbag Light ..........................55,72
Alarm, Panic ............................24
Alarm (Security Alarm) .................19,170
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ...............19
Alignment and Balance ...................288
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle .............7
Antenna, Satellite Radio ...................222
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..............367,396
Disposal ............................369
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............269,270
Anti-Lock Warning Light ..................170
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ........19
Anti-Theft System .....................19,170
Appearance Care ........................376
Assistance Towing ........................96
Auto Unlock, Doors .......................31
Automatic Door Locks .....................30
Automatic Transaxle ....................12,245
Interlock System ........................15
Automatic Transmission .............239,246,372
Adding Fluid .........................373
Fluid Level Check ......................372
Fluid Type ...........................398
Gear Ranges ..........................246
Special Additives ......................374
Torque Converter ......................250
Axle Fluid .............................398
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) ...............375
428 INDEX
Battery ...............................359
Charging ............................343
Emergency Starting .....................343
Gas Caution ..........................343
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) .......26
Saving Feature (Protection) ...............124
Belts, Seat ..............................37
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...............362
Box, Sound ............................220
B-Pillar Location ........................276
Brake Fluid ............................398
Brake System ........................269,371
Anti-Lock (ABS) ....................269,270
Fluid Check ..........................371
Master Cylinder .......................371
Parking .............................267
Warning Light .....................170,174
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...............246
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........70
Bulb Replacement .......................387
Bulbs, Light ............................387
Calibration, Compass .....................140
Camper ...............................157
Capacities, Fluid ........................396
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ..........................357
Power Steering ........................266
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ...............368
Car Washes ............................377
Carbon Monoxide Warning ..............158,302
Cargo Light ............................126
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) ...................308
Cellular Phone ........................82,228
Center High Mounted Stop Light ............391
Certification Label .......................308
Changing A Flat Tire .....................332
Charging ..............................343
INDEX 429
10
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................273
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light) ................................354
Child Restraint ........................58,59
Child Restraint Tether Anchors .............61,66
Child Seat ..............................63
Cleaning
Wheels .............................378
Climate Control .........................228
Clock .....................179,182,196,199,209
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .............227
Compact Spare Tire ......................284
Compass ..............................140
Compass Calibration .....................140
Compass Variance .......................141
Computer, Trip/Travel ....................136
Console, Floor ..........................154
Console, Overhead .......................135
Contract, Service ........................425
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ..........368
Cooling System .........................366
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............367
Coolant Capacity ......................396
Coolant Level ......................366,369
Disposal of Used Coolant ................369
Drain, Flush, and Refill ..................366
Inspection ...........................369
Points to Remember ....................370
Pressure Cap .........................368
Radiator Cap .........................368
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......367,396,397
Temperature Gauge .....................168
Crates
Rear Convenience Storage ................151
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ..............132
Cupholders ............................150
Customer Assistance .....................423
430 INDEX
Data Recorder, Event ......................56
Daytime Running Lights ...................126
Dealer Service ..........................356
Defroster, Rear Window ...................156
Defroster, Windshield ...................72,230
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .................130
Diagnostic System, Onboard ................353
Differential, Limited-Slip ..................262
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .................169
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission .................372
Oil (Engine) ..........................356
Power Steering ........................266
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...............369
Door Locks .............................29
Door Opener, Garage .....................142
Drive Shaft Universal Joints ................361
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ........................264
E-85 Fuel .............................302
Electric Remote Mirrors ....................81
Electrical Power Outlets ...................149
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......132
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ...............346
Jacking .............................337
Tow Hooks ..........................346
Towing .............................347
Emission Control System Maintenance ......354,400
Engine
Air Cleaner ..........................359
Block Heater .........................241
Break-In Recommendations ................70
Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................397
INDEX 431
10
Exhaust Gas Caution ..................71,302
Flooded, Starting ......................240
Fuel Requirements .....................396
Jump Starting .........................343
Oil ...........................356,396,397
Oil Filler Cap .........................357
Oil Selection ..........................396
Oil Synthetic .........................358
Starting .............................239
Temperature Gauge .....................168
Entry System, Illuminated ..................20
Event Data Recorder ......................56
Exhaust Gas Caution ................71,302,364
Exhaust System .......................71,363
Extender, Seat Belt ........................45
Exterior Lighting ........................125
Fabric Care ............................379
Filters
Air Cleaner ..........................359
Engine Oil ........................358,397
Engine Oil Disposal ....................358
Flashers
Hazard Warning .......................332
Turn Signal .....................127,168,389
Flat Tire Stowage ........................343
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range ........................305
Engine Oil ...........................305
Fuel Requirements ..................302,304
Replacement Parts .....................305
Starting .............................305
Flooded Engine Starting ...................240
Floor Console ..........................154
Fluid, Brake ...........................398
Fluid Capacities .........................396
432 INDEX
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission .................372
Brake ...............................371
Engine Oil ...........................356
Power Steering ........................266
Transfer Case .........................375
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ..........397
Fog Lights ..........................126,395
Four Wheel Drive .......................251
Operation ...........................251
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ..................332
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...................346
Front Axle (Differential) ...................376
Fuel .................................297
Adding .............................306
Gauge ..............................168
Octane Rating ......................297,397
Requirements ......................297,396
Tank Capacity ........................396
Fuel, Flexible .............See Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Fueling ...............................306
Fuses ................................381
Garage Door Opener (HomeLinkt) ...........142
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...............306,353
Gas Gauge (Fuel Gauge) ...................168
Gasoline (Fuel) .........................297
Gasoline, Reformulated ...................298
Gauges
Coolant Temperature ....................168
Fuel ................................168
Odometer .........................171,173
Speedometer .........................170
Tachometer ..........................171
Gear Ranges ........................243,246
General Information ...................110,297
Glass Cleaning ..........................380
Grocery Bag Retainer .....................153
INDEX 433
10
Gross Axle Weight Rating ...............309,311
Gross Cargo Weight ......................308
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ................311
GVWR ...............................308
Hands-Free Phone (UConnectt) ..............82
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or
Shallow Standing Water ...................264
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................332
Headlights ............................387
High Beam ...........................128
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ........128
Lights On Reminder ....................126
Passing .............................128
Switch ..............................125
Heated Seats ...........................120
Heater, Engine Block .....................241
High Beam Indicator .....................169
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 128
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................315
Holder, Cup ...........................150
HomeLinkt (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 142
Hood Release ..........................121
Ignition
Key.................................12
Illuminated Entry ........................20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ...................16
Infant Restraint ..........................58
Inflation Pressure Tires ....................289
Inside Rearview Mirror ....................80
Instrument Cluster .......................168
Instrument Panel and Controls ..............166
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .............380
Interior Appearance Care ..................379
Interior Lights ..........................123
434 INDEX
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...........130
Introduction .............................4
Jack Operation .......................332,337
Jacking Instructions ......................338
Key, Programming ........................17
Key, Replacement ........................17
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...................16
Keyless Entry System ......................21
Keys .................................12
Knee Bolster ............................46
Lane Change and Turn Signals .........127,168,389
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................37
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren) ..............................61
Life of Tires ............................286
Lights ..............................73,123
Airbag ............................55,178
Anti-Lock Warning .....................170
Back-Up .............................389
Brake Warning ........................174
Bulb Replacement ......................387
Cargo ..............................126
Center Mounted Stop ...................391
Courtesy/Reading .....................136
Cruise ..............................178
Daytime Running ......................126
Fog ..........................126,173,395
Hazard Warning Flasher .................332
Headlights ...........................125
High Beam ...........................128
High Beam/Low Beam Select .............128
Instrument Cluster .....................168
Intensity Control .......................123
Interior ..........................123,136
License .............................394
INDEX 435
10
Lights On Reminder ....................126
Low Fuel ............................168
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ........175
Passing .............................128
Seat Belt Reminder .....................169
Service ..............................387
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ...........176
Turn Signal .....................127,387,389
Voltage .............................170
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) .....168
Limited-Slip Differential ...................262
Loading Vehicle .........................308
Tires ...............................276
Locks .................................29
Auto Unlock ..........................31
Automatic Door ........................30
Child Protection ........................32
Door ................................29
Keys ................................12
Power Door ...........................29
Steering Wheel .........................15
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) ..............................61
Lubrication, Body .......................362
Lug Nuts .............................341
Lumbar Support ........................117
Maintenance Free Battery ..................359
Maintenance Procedures ...................356
Maintenance Schedule ....................400
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 175,354
Manual, Service .........................421
Manual Transmission ...............239,242,372
Fluid Level Check ......................372
Lubricant Selection ..................372,398
Shift Speeds ..........................243
Map/Reading Lights .....................136
Mirrors ................................80
436 INDEX
Electric Powered .......................81
Outside ..............................80
Rearview .............................80
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle .............7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...............292
Mopar Parts .........................355,420
Multi-Function Control Lever ...............127
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................70
Occupant Restraints .......................36
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..............297
Oil Change Indicator .....................172
Oil Change Indicator, Reset .................172
Oil, Engine .........................356,397
Capacity ............................396
Change Interval .......................357
Dipstick .............................356
Disposal ............................358
Filter ............................358,397
Filter Disposal ........................358
Identification Logo .....................357
Materials Added to .....................358
Recommendation ...................357,396
Synthetic ............................358
Viscosity ..........................357,396
Onboard Diagnostic System ..............353,354
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLinkt) ...........142
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors ..................80
Overdrive ..........................171,248
Overdrive OFF Switch ....................248
Overhead Console ....................135,136
Overhead Travel Information Center ..........136
Overheating, Engine ......................169
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) .........4,421
Panic Alarm ............................24
INDEX 437
10
Parking Brake ..........................267
Parking On Hill .........................267
Passing Light ...........................128
Pets ..................................70
Pets, Transporting ........................70
Phone, Cellular ..........................82
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnectt) ..............82
Pickup Box ............................159
Placard, Tire and Loading Information .........276
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) ...............381
Door Locks .........................20,29
Mirrors ..............................81
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ..........149
Steering .............................266
Windows .............................34
Power Steering Fluid .....................398
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ..............45
Preparation for Jacking ....................337
Pretensioners
Seat Belts .............................44
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless
Entry) .................................25
Quad Cab .............................120
Radial Ply Tires .........................283
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .......366,368
Radio Operation ........................228
Radio, Satellite ..........................221
Rear Axle (Differential) ....................376
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails ...............155
Rear Convenience Storage Crates .............151
Rear Window ..........................157
Rear Window Defroster ...................156
Rear Window Features ....................156
Rearview Mirrors ........................80
Reclining Front Seats .....................116
438 INDEX
Recorder, Event Data ......................56
Recreational Towing ......................324
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) .......325
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) .....327
Reformulated Gasoline ....................298
Refrigerant ............................361
Release, Hood ..........................121
Reminder, Seat Belt .......................44
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .................21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........226
Remote Starting System ....................27
Replacement Keys ........................17
Replacement Parts .......................355
Replacement Tires .......................287
Reporting Safety Defects ...................420
Resetting Oil Change Indicator ..............172
Restraints, Child .......................58,63
Restraints, Occupant ......................36
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck ................346
Rotation, Tires ..........................291
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................72
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...............73
Safety Defects, Reporting ..................420
Safety Information, Tire ...................272
Safety Tips .............................71
Satellite Radio ..........................221
Satellite Radio Antenna ...................222
Schedule, Maintenance ....................400
Seat Belt Maintenance ....................381
Seat Belt Reminder .......................44
Seat Belts ..........................36,37,72
And Pregnant Women ...................45
Child Restraint .......................58,59
Extender .............................45
Front Seat ............................37
Pretensioners ..........................44
Reminder ............................169
INDEX 439
10
Seats .................................115
Adjustment ..........................115
Cleaning ............................379
Heated .............................120
Lumbar Support .......................117
Reclining ............................116
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) .............19,170
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........367,397
Selection of Oil .........................357
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ...................16
Sentry Key Programming ...................17
Sentry Key Replacement ...................17
Service and Maintenance ..................356
Service Assistance ....................419,423
Service Contract .........................425
Service Manuals ........................421
Setting the Clock .............179,182,196,199,209
Shift Speeds ...........................243
Shifting
Automatic Transmission .................246
Manual Transmission ...................242
Transfer Case .........................251
Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer Case
Neutral (N) ..........................325
Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer Case
Neutral (N) ..........................327
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage ..............42
Shoulder Belts ...........................37
Signals, Turn .....................127,168,389
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .................289
Snow Plow ............................323
Snow Tires ............................291
Sound Box ............................220
Spare Tire ..........................284,334
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..............132
Speedometer ...........................170
Starting ...............................239
440 INDEX
Emergency (Jump Starting) ...............343
Engine Block Heater ....................241
Engine Fails to Start ....................240
Remote ..............................27
Steering
Column Controls ......................127
Power ..............................266
Wheel Lock ...........................15
Wheel, Tilt ...........................131
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls ..............................226
Storage, Behind the Seat ...................151
Storage Bin ............................151
Storage, Vehicle .........................386
Stuck, Freeing ..........................346
Supplemental Tire Pressure Information ........289
Synthetic Engine Oil ......................358
System, Remote Starting ....................27
Tachometer ............................171
Tailgate ...............................158
Taillights ..............................389
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant ..........168
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ...............61
Tilt Steering Column .....................131
Tip Start ..............................239
Tire and Loading Information Placard ......276,289
Tire Identification Number (TIN) .............275
Tire Markings ..........................272
Tire Safety Information ....................272
Tires ............................73,280,422
Aging (Life of Tires) ....................286
Air Pressure ..........................280
Alignment ...........................288
Chains ..............................289
Changing ............................332
Compact Spare ........................284
General Information ....................280
INDEX 441
10
High Speed ..........................282
Inflation Pressures .....................281
Jacking .............................337
Life of Tires ..........................286
Load Capacity .....................276,277
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ...........292
Pressure Warning Light ..................176
Quality Grading .......................422
Radial ..............................283
Replacement .........................287
Rotation .............................291
Safety ...........................272,280
Sizes ...............................273
Snow Tires ...........................291
Spare Tire ...........................334
Spinning ............................285
Tread Wear Indicators ...................286
Wheel Mounting .......................337
Wheel Nut Torque .....................341
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ..............316
Torque Converter Clutch ..................250
Tow Hooks, Emergency ...................346
Towing ...............................310
24-Hour Towing Assistance ................96
Disabled Vehicle .......................347
Guide ..............................316
Recreational ..........................324
Weight ..............................316
Towing Assistance ........................96
Traction ..............................263
Trailer Towing ..........................310
Cooling System Tips ....................323
Hitches .............................315
Minimum Requirements .................317
Trailer and Tongue Weight ................316
Wiring ..............................320
Trailer Towing Guide .....................316
Trailer Weight ..........................316
442 INDEX
Transaxle .............................245
Automatic .........................12,245
Manual ..............................14
Operation ...........................245
Transfer Case ...........................375
Fluid ...............................398
Transmission ........................246,372
Automatic ......................239,246,372
Fluid ............................372,398
Maintenance ..........................372
Manual ........................239,242,372
Shifting .............................243
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry) .................................26
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLinkt) . . 142
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless
Entry) .................................25
Tread Wear Indicators ....................286
Trip Computer ..........................136
Trip Odometer ..........................173
Trip Odometer Reset Button ................179
Turn Signals ...................127,168,387,389
UConnectt (Hands-Free Phone) ..............82
Underhood Fuses ........................381
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................422
Universal Transmitter .....................142
Unlock, Auto ...........................31
Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area ...............155
Variance, Compass .......................141
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............6
Vehicle Loading ......................277,308
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ..............7
Vehicle Storage .........................386
Voice Recognition System (VR) ..............110
INDEX 443
10
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Description) ...........................168
Warnings and Cautions .....................6
Warranty Information .....................419
Washers, Windshield .....................131
Washing Vehicle .........................377
Water
Driving Through ......................264
Weight Load Carrying ....................308
Wheel Alignment and Balance ...............288
Wheel and Wheel Trim ....................378
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................378
Wheel Changing ........................332
Wheel Mounting ........................337
Wheel Nut Torque .......................341
Wind Buffeting ..........................35
Window Fogging ........................232
Windows ..............................34
Power ...............................34
Rear Sliding ..........................156
Windshield Defroster .....................230
Windshield Washers ................129,131,363
Fluid ............................129,363
Windshield Wiper Blades ..................362
Windshield Wipers .......................129
Wiper Blade Replacement ..................362
Wipers, Intermittent ......................130
Wrecker Towing .........................347
YES Essentialst Fabric Cleaning Procedure ......379
444 INDEX
INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION HOW TO USE THIS MANUALWARNINGS AND CAUTIONS VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VEHICLEMODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS THINGS TO KNOW BEFORESTARTING YOUR VEHICLE AWORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Ignition Key RemovalLocking Doors With The KeySTEERING WHEEL LOCK - IF EQUIPPED If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering WheelTo Release The Steering Wheel LockAutomatic Transmission Ignition Interlock SystemSENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
- IF EQUIPPED Replacement KeysCustomer Key ProgrammingVEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED To Set the AlarmTo Disarm the SystemILLUMINATED ENTRY Vehicles Equipped With Power Door LocksREMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY To Unlock The
DoorsToLock The DoorsUsingThe Panic AlarmGeneralInformationProgramming AdditionalTransmittersBattery ReplacementREMOTE STARTING SYSTEM - IFEQUIPPED DOOR LOCKS ManualDoor LocksPower Door LocksChild ProtectionDoor LockWINDOWS Power
WindowsAuto Down (Drivers Side Only)Window Lockout SwitchWind BuffetingOCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Lap/Shoulder BeltsAdjustable Upper Shoulder Belt AnchorageAutomatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode - If EquippedCenter Lap BeltsSeat Belt Pretensioners
Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert) Seat Belts And Pregnant WomenSeat Belt ExtenderDriver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - AirbagsEvent Data Recorder (EDR)Child RestraintENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS SAFETY TIPS Exhaust SystemSafety Checks You Should Make Inside The VehicleSafety Checks You Should Make Outside The VehicleUNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MIRRORS Inside Day/Night MirrorOutside Mirrors
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature - If EquippedPower MirrorsHANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect) - IF EQUIPPED OperationPhone Call FeaturesUConnect System FeaturesAdvanced Phone ConnectivityThings You Should Know About Your UConnect System
General InformationVOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (VR) - IF EQUIPPED Voice Recognition System (VR) OperationCommandsVoice TrainingSEATS Manual Seat AdjustmentFront Seats Manual Seat ReclinersManual Lumbar Support Adjustment - If EquippedAdjustable
Head Restraints - Front Seating PositionsSix-Way Power Seat Adjuster - Drivers Side OnlyExtended Cab/Crew Cab Rear SeatHeated Seats - If EquippedTO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD LIGHTS Interior LightsBattery SaverHeadlight DelayHeadlights, Parking Lights
And Panel LightsDaytime Running Lights (Canada - Standard and U.S. Fleet Vehicles) - If EquippedLights-on ReminderFog Lights - If EquippedCargo Light - If EquippedMultifunction LeverWINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield WipersWindshield Washers
TILT STEERING COLUMN ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL - IF EQUIPPED To ActivateTo Set At A Desired SpeedTo DeactivateTo Resume SpeedTo Vary The Speed SettingTo Accelerate For PassingOVERHEAD CONSOLE Courtesy/Reading Lights
COMPASS/TEMPERATURE MINI-TRIP COMPUTER US/M ButtonRESET ButtonSTEP ButtonAverage Fuel Economy (AVG ECO)Distance To Empty (DTE)Trip Odometer (ODO)Elapsed Time (ET)C/T ButtonGlobal ResetCompass/Temperature DisplayAutomatic Compass
CalibrationManual Compass CalibrationTo Put Into a Calibration ModeOutside TemperatureGARAGE DOOR OPENER - IF EQUIPPED Programming HomeLinkGate Operator/Canadian ProgrammingUsing HomeLinkReprogramming A Single HomeLink ButtonSecurity
Troubleshooting TipsGeneral InformationELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS Electrical Outlet Use With Engine OFF (Battery Fed Configuration)CUPHOLDERS REAR STORAGE - IF EQUIPPED Rear Convenience Storage CratesPlastic Grocery Bag Retainers FLOOR
CONSOLE - IF EQUIPPED Floor Console FeaturesREAR CARGO AREAUTILITY RAILS REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster - If EquippedSliding Rear Window - If EquippedSLIDE-IN CAMPERS CamperApplicationsGeneral InformationCarbon Monoxide
Warning-Vehicles Equipped With A Cap or Slide-In CampersTAILGATE Tailgate RemovalTwo-Position Tailgate/Upper Load PlatformUNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DESCRIPTION ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK Clock Setting ProcedureSALES CODE REQ - AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND 6-DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX JACK) Operating Instructions - Radio ModeOperation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)Notes On Playing MP3/WMA FilesLIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)AM/FM/CD/DVD MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM RADIO (RER/REN) - IF EQUIPPED Operating Instructions - Voice
Recognition System (VR) - If EquippedOperating Instructions -Hands-Free Communication (UConnect) - If EquippedClock Setting ProcedureSALES CODERES - AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITHCD PLAYER (MP3AUX JACK) Operating Instructions - Radio ModeOperation
Instructions - CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio PlayNotes on Playing MP3 FilesOperation Instructions - Auxiliary ModeSALES CODE RES/RSC - AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND SIRIUS RADIO Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
Operation Instructions - CDMODE for CD andMP3 Audio PlayNotesOn Playing MP3 FilesLISTButton (CD Mode for MP3 Play)INFO Button(CD Mode for MP3Play)SOUND BOX OPERATION SATELLITERADIO - IF EQUIPPED (REN/REQ/RER/RES/REURADIOS ONLY)
System ActivationElectronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID)Selecting Satellite ModeSatellite AntennaReception QualityOperating Instructions - Satellite ModeOperating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone (If Equipped)Operating Instructions - Video
Entertainment System (VES) (If Equipped)REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS - IF EQUIPPED Radio OperationCD PlayerCD/DVD MAINTENANCE RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES CLIMATE CONTROLS Air Conditioning And Heater Operating Tips
Operation Tips Chart STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING PROCEDURES Manual TransmissionAutomatic TransmissionNormal StartingExtreme Cold Weather (below -20 degrees F or -29 degrees C)If Engine Fails To StartAfter StartingENGINE BLOCK HEATER -
IF EQUIPPED MANUAL TRANSMISSION Shifting DownshiftingReverse ShiftingAUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Brake/Transmission Interlock SystemAutomatic TransmissionFOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION NV233/243 GII Transfer Case Operating Information/
PrecautionsShifting Procedure -NV233/243 Transfer Case NV244 Generation IITransfer Case Operating Information/ PrecautionsShifting Procedure- NV 244Generation II Transfer Case LIMITED-SLIPREAR AXLE DIFFERENTIAL- IF EQUIPPEDDRIVING ON SLIPPERY
SURFACES DRIVING THROUGH WATER Flowing/Rising WaterShallow Standing WaterPOWER STEERING Power Steering Fluid CheckPARKING BRAKE BRAKE SYSTEM Rear-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) - If EquippedFour-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS)TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings Tire Identification Number (TIN)Tire Loading and Tire PressureTIRES - GENERAL INFORMATION Tire PressureTire Inflation PressuresTire Pressures for High Speed OperationRadial Ply TiresCompact Spare Tire - If
EquippedLimited-Use Spare - If EquippedTire SpinningTread Wear IndicatorsLife of TireReplacement TiresAlignment And BalanceSUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE
INFORMATION - IF EQUIPPED TIRE CHAINS SNOW TIRES TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) - IF EQUIPPED Base System - If EquippedGeneral InformationFUEL REQUIREMENTS Reformulated Gasoline
Gasoline/Oxygenate BlendsE-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel VehiclesMMT In GasolineMaterials Added To FuelFuel System CautionsCarbon Monoxide WarningsFLEXIBLE FUEL (4.7L ENGINE ONLY) - IF EQUIPPED E-85 General InformationETHANOL FUEL (E-85)Fuel
RequirementsSelection Of EngineOil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles (E-85) andGasoline VehiclesStartingCruisingRangeReplacement PartsADDING FUELFuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)VEHICLELOADING Certification LabelCurbWeightLoadingTRAILER TOWINGCommon Towing
DefinitionsTrailer Hitch ClassificationTrailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)Trailer and Tongue WeightTowing RequirementsTowing TipsSNOWPLOW RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) 2WD Models4WD ModelsWHAT TO DO
IN EMERGENCIES HAZARD WARNING FLASHERCHANGING AFLAT TIREJack LocationRemoving The Spare TireTire Changing ProcedurePreparationsInstructionsTo Stow the Flat or SpareJUMP-STARTING FREEINGA STUCK VEHICLE EMERGENCYTOW HOOKS
- IF EQUIPPED TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Four-Wheel Drive VehiclesTwo-Wheel Drive VehiclesMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT - 3.7L ENGINE COMPARTMENT - 4.7L ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM - OBD II Loose Fuel Filler Cap
MessageEMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS REPLACEMENT PARTS DEALER SERVICE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES Engine OilEngine Oil FilterEngine Air Cleaner FilterMaintenance-Free BatteryAir Conditioner MaintenanceDrive Shaft
Constant Velocity JointsBody LubricationWindshield Wiper BladesWindshield WashersExhaust SystemCooling SystemBrake SystemClutch Hydraulic SystemManual TransmissionAutomatic TransmissionTransfer CaseAxlesAppearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
FUSES Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center)VEHICLE STORAGE REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS BULB REPLACEMENT Headlight (Halogen)/Front Park And Turn LightsRear Side Marker, Taillamps/Stop Lamps, And Turn Signal Bulbs - ReplacementCenter
High-Mounted Stop Light AndCargo LampLicense LampsFog LightsFLUIDS AND CAPACITIES FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS EngineChassisMAINTENANCE SCHEDULES EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCEMAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Required Maintenance IntervalsIF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The AppointmentPrepare A ListBe Reasonable With RequestsWARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
MOPAR PARTS REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS InThe 50 United States AndWashington, D.CIn CanadaPUBLICATION ORDERFORMS DEPARTMENT OFTRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIREQUALITY GRADES TreadwearTraction GradesTemperature GradesIF YOU
NEED ASSISTANCE Chrysler LLC Customer CenterChrysler Canada Inc. Customer CenterIn Mexico contactCustomer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)Service ContractINDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
2009 DA KOTA
D A KOTA
Chrysler LLC
81-326-0934
First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
OWNER’S MANUAL
2009
